KR20160062036A - Communication device - Google Patents

Abstract

A communication device is provided, wherein the communication device comprises a first major surface comprising a mixed array and a display. A mixed array includes at least two different types of array units, occupying an area at least substantially coincident with the entire major surface when viewed in a plan view perpendicular to the major surface. The mixed array includes at least one emission or transmission element and at least one input or receiving element that are positioned in the pixel stack.

Description

COMMUNICATION DEVICE

[0001] The present application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 61 / 698,529, filed September 7, 2012, and U.S. Serial No. 14 / 021,772, filed September 9, 2013, The entirety of which is hereby incorporated by reference.

[0002] [0002] The field of the art is related to electronic devices, and more particularly to portable electronic devices capable of performing identification, secure transactions, and other user oriented services will be.

[0003] Magnetic cards have many uses. Examples include credit cards, debit cards, medical and insurance cards, drug payement cards, health care service cards, stored value cards, identification cards, access entry cards, . Many of these cards have information stored in a magnetic stripe for provisioning for communication with POS (point of sale) systems.

[0004] At the same time, portable user devices, such as smart mobile phones and wireless computers, provide users with a wide variety of information and communication capabilities. Some portable user devices increase the use of magnetic cards, for example, by allowing modification of information in the magnetic strips of the cards. There are also mobile devices that interface to magnetic stripe readers through the use of card slots. Additionally, there are card readers that are completely internal to the security facade, such as are typically found in automated teller machines (ATMs).

[0005] In a first aspect of the present disclosure, a communication device includes a major surface having a first array of mixed arrays comprising a display and at least two different types of array units. The first mixed array occupies a region that is at least substantially coincident with the entire first major surface, in plan view as seen perpendicular to the first major surface. In the context of this disclosure, the phrase "at least substantially" may, in one embodiment, mean an entire first major surface having an edge margin that is limited by manufacturing capability, , A substantial portion of the first major surface, such as at least 90% of the major surface. In yet another embodiment, the term "at least substantially" also includes the majority of the first major surface, e.g., at least 90% of the first major surface, while the third edge in the second direction, And proceeding from the first edge to the second edge in one direction with a distance (limited only by manufacturing capability) away from the edge. Accordingly, the term "at least substantially" should be read without limitation because some applications may use the teachings of the present disclosure over a portion of the surface rather than the entire surface.

[0006] In a second aspect of the present disclosure, a method of communicating between a first communication device and a second communication device is provided. Each communication device comprising a first major surface comprising a display and a mixed array comprising at least two different array units, each of the mixed arrays comprising a top view that is seen to be perpendicular to each of the first major surfaces Occupies an area of an individual communication device at least substantially coincident with the entire first major surface. Each first major surface including one emission pixel and one emission detection pixel provided to emit at separate angles to a line normal to each of the first major surfaces and to detect this emission . Each communication device also includes at least one controllable magnetic element. The method includes magnetically levitating a second communication device on a first communication device such that the first communication device and the second communication device are substantially aligned with each other in a top view, And at least one emission detection pixel of the second communication device is adapted to substantially control the angular position of the second communication device so that at least one emission detection pixel detects emission from the at least one emission pixel. Controlling the element, and communicating data between those at least one emission detection pixel being arranged to detect emission from the at least one emission pixel.

[0007] In a third aspect of the present disclosure, an authentication method uses a communication device comprising a mixed array comprising a main surface, a display and at least two different array units, Occupy an area of an individual communication device at least substantially coincident with the entire major surface. The method includes sensing at least two types of biometric characteristics from a single target adjacent to a major surface to generate biometric data associated with the two characteristic types using at least two different array units, To the stored biometric authentication data, and determining whether to authenticate based on the comparison.

[0008] In a fourth aspect of the present disclosure, a method of performing a transaction uses a communication device comprising a main surface comprising a display and a mixed array comprising at least two different array units, Occupies an area of an individual communication device at least substantially coincident with the entire major surface, in plan view perpendicular to the major surfaces. The method includes scanning at least one item to be purchased using at least one of the two different array units, generating a list containing data identifying each scanned item, using the communication device Sending a list to a remote computer; and finishing the transaction based on each item on the list, the transaction amount comprising a search for a best value performed by the remote computer for each item on the list, and Is adjusted based on retrieval.

[0009] FIG. 1 is a diagram of a communication system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0010] FIG. 2 is a diagram of a card system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0011] Figures 3 A- 3 C illustrate perspective, plan and side views, respectively, of a card according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure;
[0012] Figures 4A-4D are diagrams illustrating exemplary pixel arrays and pixel elements.
[0013] FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the card shown in FIG. 3B taken along lines 5-5.
[0014] FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the substrate of the card shown in FIG. 5, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure;
[0015] Figures 7A and 7B are diagrams of portions of a card in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. 7A is a plan view of a portion of the card, and FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the card taken along lines 7B-7B of FIG. 7A.
[0016] Figures 8A and 8B are diagrams of portions of a card in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. 8A is a plan view of a portion of the card, and Fig. 8B is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the card taken along lines 8B-8B in Fig. 8A.
[0017] Figures 9A-9E are diagrams illustrating the perspective views of pixel stacks in accordance with exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
[0018] Figures 10A through 10C are diagrams illustrating an example embodiment of cards that includes a configuration that allows one card to float over another card through magnetic elements. 10A is a top view of a card containing embedded magnetic elements. 10B is a side view of the first card and the second card, wherein the second card is magnetically levitated above the first card. 10C is a side view of the first card and the second card of Fig. 10B illustrating that the first card controls the position of the second card. Fig.
[0019] Figures 11a and 11b are diagrams of exemplary embodiments of card holding brackets of the present disclosure, wherein Figure 11a has a plurality of horizontally oriented cards and Figure 11b is a cross- And a plurality of cards.
[0020] Figures 12A-12C are portable card swipe brackets in accordance with illustrative embodiments of the present disclosure.
[0021] FIG. 13 is a conventional or legacy card reader, or a credit / debit card processor.
[0022] FIG. 14 is a diagram of a point of sale (POS) card reader in accordance with exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.
[0023] Figures 15A-C are diagrams illustrating a card reader configured with a legacy card reader using exemplary switching techniques.
[0024] Figures 16A-16E are diagrams of tethers in accordance with exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure. 16A shows a tether connected to a communication device; 16B is a side view showing the details of the tether shown in Fig. 16A; Fig. 16C is a front view of the head of the tether shown in Figs. 16A and 16B; Fig. 16D is a side view of another tether in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure; And Figure 16E is a front view or back view of a tether head in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0025] FIGS. 17A and 17B are diagrams illustrating a conventional or legacy card. 17C is a diagram illustrating a conventional or legacy card being replicated to a card in accordance with the illustrative embodiments of the present disclosure.
[0026] FIG. 18A is a diagram showing two cards having different pixel densities. 18B is a diagram illustrating pixel allocation for maintaining compatible communications backwards through repetitions of the card design. 18C is a diagram illustrating cards of different sizes overlapping according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0027] Figure 19 is a timing diagram illustrating data transfer between cards in a docked stack or involving an external POS device.
[0028] FIG. 20 is a top view of a card in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0029] FIG. 21 is a stylized view of the pixel actuation zone of the card of FIG. 20, illustrating the progression of the data stream in the pixel working zone according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. Respectively.
[0030] FIG. 22 is a legacy strip module for controlling the card of FIG. 20 so that the card may interface with a legacy card reader, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0031] FIG. 23 is a process of the legacy strip module of FIG. 22 for controlling a card in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0032] FIG. 24 is a plan view of a card according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, illustrating an RFID module with imaginary lines.
[0033] Figure 25 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the card of Figure 24 along lines 25-25.
[0034] Figure 26 is a top view of a card according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, having components of an RFID module positioned on a card substrate.
[0035] Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the card of Figure 26 along lines 27-27.
[0036] Figure 28 is a plan view of a card according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure having a plurality of RFID receivers.
[0037] Figure 29 is a top view of a venue including a local RFID transmitter and receiver network providing RFID localization capability.
[0038] Figure 30 is a venue interface module for implementing cards in a venue, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0039] FIG. 31 is a process of the Venetian interface module of FIG. 30, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0040] Figure 32 is an RFID antenna layer positioned on a card in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0041] Figure 33 is a portion of a venue that includes RFID technology in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0042] Figure 34 is a top view of a mat according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0043] Figure 35 is a side view of the mat of Figure 34 along lines 35-35.
[0044] FIG. 36 is a perspective view of a mat and an overlay in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0045] Figure 37 is a drawing of a user's hand holding a card with a static gesture, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0046] Figure 38 is a drawing of a user's hand holding a card with a static gesture, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0047] Figure 39 is a drawing of a user's hand holding a card with a static gesture, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0048] Figure 40 is a gesture module for implementing the static gestures of Figures 37-39, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0049] FIG. 41 is a process of the gesture module of FIG. 40, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0050] Figure 42 is a plan view of a plurality of cards in a side-by-side arrangement.
[0051] Figure 43 is a matrix display module for generating an ad hook display using a plurality of cards, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0052] Figure 44 is a matrix display process of the matrix display module of Figure 43, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0053] Figure 45 is a user identification and control module in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0054] Figure 46 is a user identification process of the user identification and control module of Figure 45, in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0055] Figure 47 is a view that includes a security system in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure.

[0056] The present inventors have found that many of the capabilities of portable user devices, such as smart mobile phones and wireless computers, which provide a wide variety of information and communication capabilities, are also closely related to the activities of associating user devices such as magnetic or smart cards and magnetic readers I knew that I could be involved.

[0057] In an embodiment in accordance with the present disclosure, a seamless network of cards and mobile platforms is provided to provide a user with exactly the portable device of network-connected security capable of providing authenticated information and interacting with the market and the associated environment of the market. ) ≪ / RTI >

[0058] The present disclosure can be used in a POS or can emit a standard credit card or debit card in a manner that can physically be transacted with embedded legacy readers such as in an ATM, Providing a mobile computerized platform. Accordingly, the applications of the card according to the present disclosure may include readers and legacy card readers provided within the ATM machine, such as a debit card is being processed.

[0059] Electronic devices involve costs for environmental factors such as reduced resistance to shock and moisture. Conventional plastic cards with magnetic stripes exhibit susceptibility to the exposed magnetic stripe material by direct damage or magnetic induced damage. In contrast, embodiments of the present disclosure provide a card with selected capabilities of conventional plastic cards and electronic devices while having robust tolerance to these environmental factors.

[0060] A card in accordance with the present disclosure is configured to emit light, to sense light, and to at least substantially match the sensed light over the entire major planar surfaces of the card (i. E., A substantial portion of the major surfaces across its entire range) Information can be collected. In the context of this disclosure, the phrase "at least substantially" may, in one embodiment, mean an entire first major surface having an edge margin that is limited by manufacturing capability, , A substantial portion of the first major surface, such as at least 90% of the major surface. In yet another embodiment, the term "at least substantially" also includes the majority of the first major surface, e.g., at least 90% of the first major surface, while the third edge in the second direction, And proceeding from the first edge to the second edge in one direction with a distance (limited only by manufacturing capability) away from the edge. Accordingly, the term "at least substantially" should be read without limitation because some applications may use the teachings of the present disclosure over a portion of the surface rather than the entire surface. Sound may be provided as an energy source, which may be emitted and / or collected over at least one surface of the card. In some embodiments, one or more entire major surfaces of the card emit and detect one or more of an energy source such as light, sound, tactile energy sources, and feedback (e.g., haptic) can do. It should be understood that magnetic, optical, and / or audible output and input can be applied over the major surfaces of the card to a magnetic-to-electrical (I / O) interface over these same surface (s) that act invisibly and protected behind the optical and audible components. By combining the input and the magnetic-output capabilities, the card according to the present disclosure can scan and dynamically interact with the real world, thus providing a broad set of personal users, groups of users, institutions and governments New functionality and security can be tolerated. These new functionality will seek great utility and acceptability as developers create application databases, e-commerce and network applications.

[0061] The card as a user device according to the present disclosure includes the functionality of other electronic devices already held by a user interested in reducing the total number of such devices, including the domain of proof of POS usage and identity Lt; / RTI > may be required to build a footing in all possible domains. For example, the card of the present disclosure may be used to provide a convenient, secure, and efficient way of retaining only a multifunctional item, such as a cell phone, a portable computing device, a vehicle smart key, or a PDA / To allow for environmental and weight savings.

[0062] The present disclosure further includes application of features of the surface of the card referred to above to larger surfaces, displays, or mats. These mats can emulate an array of devices and can be activated with or without a touch, i.e. touchlessly, through proximity or gestures of an object such as a finger or stylus.

[0063] A card according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure may include an RFID device or array that allows the card to be used for a variety of new functions. These functions include the ability to track and locate objects or items made up of RFID tags, and the ability to generate automated lists using RFID tags. A card having the ability to read RFID tags according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure may also function as an interface between the RFID tag and the legacy card reader. The array of RFID sensors can track real-time movement of RFID tagged items or objects that widen data and card applications that can be collected by the card.

[0064] Exemplary embodiments of a card user device in accordance with the present disclosure will now be described with reference to the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions of elements having the same reference numbers may not be repeated for brevity.

[0065] Figure 1 illustrates an exemplary system (or system) 200 that communicates with a server computer 200 that includes a plurality of units and memory for performing various functions of the system, via a network 210, 1 is a diagram of network 210. The network 210 may be a wide area network (WAN) such as the Internet, an ad hoc network, a local area network (LAN), a metropolitan network (MAN), a cellular network, a wireless wide area network A private network (WPAN), and a public switched telephone network (PSTN), terrestrial wireless network, or other network, or combinations thereof. The card 100 may be connected to the card reader 212 via a card reader 212, such as a credit card reader that is routed through a wireless connection (e.g., magnetic, electromagnetics) or wired connection 213 to a POS, ATM, 212 to the network 210 via a wireless or wired communication channel 214. [ The card 100 may be communicated via one or more wireless or wired communication channels 217 via a communication device 216 such as a cell phone, PDA, electronic tablet, laptop computer, desktop computer, And a communication connection 218 between the network 210 and the server 200. [ In an exemplary embodiment, the communication device 216 is coupled to an antenna (not shown) of a wireless network base station (e.g., Node B or Node B) in communication with the network 210 via a wireless connection 220, 219 to the network 210 and the server 200. In an exemplary embodiment, with additional energy costs, the card 100 may be communicated via the base station antenna 219 over the wireless connection 224 without any intermediate communication device 216, or via one or more wireless repeaters and may be connected to the server 200 via repeaters. In an embodiment, card 100 may be connected to server 200 via wireless access point 222, communication link 225, and network 210 utilizing Wi-Fi or other wireless protocols 223 .

[0066] FIG. 2 is a diagram of system elements of an exemplary embodiment of card 100, in accordance with the present disclosure. 2, card 100 includes an address / data bus 108 through which system components communicate with a processor or controller 110 (e.g., a CPU) And is supplied with electric power by the power unit or the power source 112. The system components of the card 100 may include memory 114, e.g., volatile and non-volatile memory; An input / output (I / O) interface unit 116; A communication unit 118 and an antenna 119; Decode the video data for display on a first light emitting unit 122 communicatively coupled to the video decoder 120 and provide a second light emitting unit 124 A video decoder 120 for decoding the video data for display by the video decoder 120; A first photodetection unit 126 and a second photodetection unit 126 communicatively coupled to a video encoder 130 that encodes the video data generated in the first and second photodetection units 126 and 128, 128); A first magnetic input unit 132 and a second magnetic input unit 133 for detecting magnetic fields on respective first and second major surfaces of the card 100; A first magnetic output unit 134 and a second magnetic output unit 135 for generating magnetic fields on individual first major surfaces and second major surfaces of the card 100; Receive and encode signals including auditory information generated by the first or second microphone / speaker (micro speaker) pixel array 138, 140, provide the encoded signals to the bus 108, ) And generates a decoded signal that includes sound, speech, or haptic information and provides the decoded signal to a first or second micro speaker pixel array (138, 140) Sound / haptic / haptic encoder / decoder (codec) 136 for generating haptic feedback, or providing haptic feedback; Authentication unit 142; A location unit 144; A data exchange unit 146, and a levitation / positioning controller unit, or a Mag Lev unit 147 (described below). The term "display" when used in connection with the card 100 may have a plurality of meanings in the context of this disclosure. One use for the term display is to refer to the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting pixel elements 107 (e.g., Figs. 4A-4D) of the first light emitting unit 122 or the second light emitting unit 124 do. The light emitted by the light emitting pixel elements 107 of the first light emitting unit 122 or the second light emitting unit 124 may be transmitted to the light emitting elements 122 of the card 100 and the deformation of the card 100 To form an image that can be called or described as a display.

[0067] The processor 110 of the card 100 may include one or more processors such as at least one microprocessor, micro-controller, central processing unit (CPU), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors , Digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), and other devices designed to perform the functions described herein, and / Lt; / RTI >

[0068] In an embodiment that provides true N + 1 redundancy, the elements of the hardware design will be provided for dual and cross-interfacing so that failure of any of these elements does not result in failure of the card 100. [ These elements may include, but are not limited to, processors, memory, power, buses, pixels, and the like. The user will not experience any interruption of the service when the redundant element fails. Card 100 will attempt to reboot its down element (s), report the hardware fault recovery results, resynchronize and then report the overall success or failure to the users and servers and to the operators of the overall system . Because of the complete redundant solution, each processor representing an independent viable processor can be controlled with additional elements, such as a redundancy control processor, present to synchronize each processor to the next processor. Elements that perform synchronization to achieve redundancy may even be replicated and suffer failures without service interruption to the user. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, a first processor (not shown) may control mainly elements on one side of the card 100, while a second processor (not shown) You can control elements primarily on In the event that any one of the processors fails, both sides of the card 100 may continue to function using the remaining processors without any interruption being provided to all services.

[0069] As discussed above, the non-volatile machine-readable medium, such as memory 114 or other storage medium (s), may include instructions, routines, and other executable instructions Code and encrypted user personal and financial information. The memory 114 may be a random access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read only memory (e.g., EPROM, EEPROM, or flash memory) And combinations of the above. The memory is configured to store data to be transmitted by a transmitter of the communication unit 118 until the data is transmitted and / or a buffer that holds data received by the receiver of the communication unit 118 until the received data can be processed. Memory may also be included. Although FIG. 2 illustrates a separate or external memory 114 from the processor or controller 110, the memory may be implemented within the processor or controller 110 or other processing unit or within another processing unit. Depending on the allowable thickness of the card 100, at least some of the memory 114 may be implemented in the form of a micro hard drive or a nano-hard drive.

[0070] Many of the capabilities and other aspects of card 100 and system 1 are described herein with respect to aspects of processes and sequences of processes. Although some processes may be performed using other hardware capable of executing the programmed instructions, it should be understood that the sequences of these processes and processes may be performed by a processor or controller 110 that performs programmed instructions Will be. For example, embodiments may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or any combination thereof. The programmed instructions may be program code or code segments that perform the necessary tasks and may be stored in the memory 114. A code segment may represent a procedure, a function, a subprogram, a program, a routine, a subroutine, a module, a software package, a class, or any combination of instructions, data structures, or program statements. A code segment may be coupled to other code segments or hardware circuitry by conveying and / or receiving information, data, arguments, parameters, or content of memory 114. [

The input / output (I / O) interface unit 116 may connect other devices via I / O controllers (not shown) directly or intervening to the card 100. In an embodiment, I / O interface unit 116 allows communication between card 100 and other devices using optical, wireless (e.g., RF or magnetic), or wired / tethered channels. For example, the I / O interface may include a portion of the first or second light detection units 126, 128 present on the same side of the card 100 and a portion of the first and second light emission units 122, 124 A tether, which may include one individual corresponding portion and includes optical communication paths, may be magnetically attached to the portions to exchange data through the optical signals. In another embodiment, I / O interface unit 116 may include physical ports such as HDMI, VGA / SVGA, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T, IEEE 1394 (FireWire ^TM ) and / or USB type ports.

[0072] The communication unit 118 includes a transmitter and a receiver that are capable of communicating over a transmitting and receiving radio waves (cellular, RFID, etc.) via an antenna 119 at a wireless network element. The communication unit 118 and the antenna 119 are configured to modulate the data signal, up-convert the modulated data signal to an RF frequency, and transmit the signal including data information received from the bus 108 via the processor 110 From the antenna 119 to the remote device via the wireless network as radio waves. The communication unit 118 and the antenna 119 also receive the radio wave including the modulated signal information transmitted from the remote device over the wireless network, down-convert the received radio wave, and down- Is configured to demodulate the signal and provide an output as recovered data that is sent from the remote device to the bus 108 and the processor 110.

[0073] The wireless network element may include, for example, an access point (e.g., a Wi-Fi access point), a femtocell, a cellular telephone or personal communication or data device, a desktop computer, an RFID device, a portable computing device such as a laptop, a tablet, The method of claim 1, wherein the wireless communication devices are selected from the group consisting of code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), frequency division multiple access (FDMA), orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA), single-carrier frequency division multiple access (SC- Such as a base station using cellular communication technologies such as other wireless technologies and / or standards, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth. A wireless network may include one or more technologies such as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UTMS), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Evolution-Data Optimized or Evolution-Data only (EV-DO) , Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX), Code division multiple access (CDMA) -2000, or Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA).

[0074] Each of the first light emitting unit 122 and the second light emitting unit 124 of the card 100 includes a plurality of light emitting devices arranged on individual faces or surfaces of the card 100, Mode display, or a thin film transistor (TFT) controlled backlight or an edge-type liquid crystal display (LCD), which may be both diodes (LEDs), organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs), monochrome LCDs (LCMs), monochrome and color display modes LCD) devices or a combination of these display pixels (see Figures 3A, 3C and 4C). These light emitting arrays of the card 100 permit the display not only to display images on the main sides or surfaces of the card 100 but also to function as a light source such that these light emitting arrays are within their power limits Illuminates any object, illuminates with light of any frequency that may include one or more frequencies from infrared to ultraviolet, and card 100 is provided to emit such light. 2, the video decoder 120 receives the coded signal provided on the bus 108 from the processor 110, decodes the signal and provides the first light emitting unit 122 and / The second light emitting unit 124 controls the light emissions according to the decoded signal.

[0075] The first light emitting unit 122 and / or the second light emitting unit 124 may each serve as displays such as a cell phone display or provide POS operator (or anyone requiring operation) or identification for scanning . Display features such as enlargement of an image on the display may be provided with control to magnify. Since the card 100 includes a display, the limit associated with conventional cards is "released." For example, it is unnecessary to display the entire credit card number because the card 100 can communicate directly with the POS or other interface. If desired, the user may display only a portion of the credit card number, e.g., only the last four numbers. When the user selects the function of the card 100, the user may see all of the information that is normally present on the card 100 as a guard, if necessary, or as protection against improper disclosure of sensitive card information . In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may be emulated by a subsequent display through a plurality of hard cards that the user may hold, front-to-back, first to face-to-face scanning.

[0076] Watermarks (e.g., see FIG. 16) may be visible on at least one of the major surfaces of card 100, but invisible or invisible infrared and ultraviolet optical watermarks may be used for greater security Can be used. The use of various visible light frequencies and invisible visible frequencies for display also prevents the public enemy from connecting data movement connections, one-to-one card communication, or POS card systems because when using many wavelengths, Since it is more difficult to capture signals when they are separated into visible and invisible portions.

[0077] The expanded display provided by the first and second light emitting units 122 and 124 in a familiar form factor for a credit card can save space because the extended display has several functions Because it can provide. For example, card 100 may replace social security cards, licenses (e.g., driver's license), security / access cards, EZ passes, credit cards, debit and bank cards, And may provide emergency medical condition information related to a user or a user's immediate system. That is, while exemplary embodiments are described herein, the application range of card 100 and system 1 has a profound impact and is therefore not limited to the specific examples described herein, which will be apparent to those skilled in the art.

[0078] Each of the first and second photodetection units 126 and 128 includes a plurality of semiconductor MOS diodes (not shown) such as a charge coupled device (See Figs. 3A, 3C and 4B), wherein each of the plurality of semiconductor MOS diodes represents a pixel of an image. The optical detection units 122 and 124 may digitize the imaging signal output from the imaging device and may perform various types of correction processing, such as gamma correction, on the imaging signal, and perform encoding processing on the imaging signal And output the results to the video encoder 130 and to the processor or controller 110, respectively.

[0079] Additionally, the first and second light detection units 126 and 128 of the card 100 may be mounted to detect light generated by the card 100, or ambient light available at a given setting, or both . Due to the energy required to emit light from the light-emitting pixel elements 107 of the first light-emitting unit 122 and / or the second light-emitting unit 124, ambient light is typically transmitted through the first and second light- And is a preferred light source for the detection units 126 and 128. From certain portions of the surface of the card 100, through the emission of specific light wavelengths and patterns, the distance to the object can be determined from the detection of this radiation, and the card 100 can determine the velocity of the given target object for display or storage , To allow the use of parallax to determine acceleration, deceleration. Snapshots or videos of events can mesh motion data and image data for real-time or for future use. Through spectral analysis of the received visible and invisible light, the reading temperature, substance presence, e.g. glucose (blood sugar), atmospheric gases and blood gases can be provided by application developers. As card 100 advances and spectral analysis improves, card 100 may be configured to perform real-time forensic scanning of a given object, material, or surface, e.g., to identify all of the materials in a given target, . These functions allow developers who record many possible applications of the card 100 and applications for the card 100 to create an enhanced person-to-device interface independent of the physical touch on the card 100. [

[0080] The first and second light detection units 126 and 128 of the card 100 may form an image of objects facing the individual primary surfaces of the card 100, As a camera. However, one embodiment of the card 100 does not include a lens or set of lenses, which may be a conventional camera assembly, and the optical axis of the lens set is typically positioned perpendicular to the imaging surface. Although some other orientations are selected, minimization of image or object angles with respect to the optical axis of the light transmission passages (described below) is dependent on the minimum lens thickness and the maximum refractive index of the materials used in the lens, if such lenses are present, The refractive index of the materials can quantify their ability to bend the light and require a large cost, or simply become beyond certain limitations. As known to opticians, glasses typically provide an index of about 1.5, while glasses can achieve an index of 2.42 by utilizing lenses of pure diamond. Since the refractive index is a ratio relative to the sine of the lens pre-incidence angle of incidence relative to the angle of incidence after the lens (and their signatures can be replaced by their respective actual angles when in close proximity to the optical axis, ), The length of the optical axis will always be several times the lens thickness. In addition, since the optical axes are always perpendicular to the two dimensions of the planar lens, as is known in optical technologies, the optical axes can not also be reduced below a certain multiple of the lens thickness due to so-called "thin lens approximations ". Thus, the lensing requirements have minimal constraints on three orthogonal dimensions, and when one of these form factors in the form factor of the card 100 substantially corresponds to the thickness of the credit card, RTI ID = 0.0 > optical < / RTI > assemblies. In an embodiment, the card 100 may be used in a variety of applications, such as micro-lengthening, pinhole lens technologies and image processing software, or simple collection of light by CMOS or CCD (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to simply as &Quot; CCD "pixels). As will be described in greater detail below, the card 100 does not have analog optics (such as a conventional lens) and further, on the major faces, surfaces, or faces of the card 100 The total amount of display and capture area may be a key factor for proper functionality according to some embodiments, since it may be required to display detailed and sometimes secure images. To position the pinhole apertures on the surface of a convex or concave substrate pattern, for example repeating, such as viewing a golf ball surface or a composite lens of an insect, such as a sleeping eye, to provide a wider viewing angle, It is possible to emulate the analog lens by changing the supporting substrate.

[0081] As can be appreciated, the imaging and display capabilities of the card 100 can be leveraged or used "invisible" or buried (hidden) magnetic layers that can be controlled to behave as stripes that can be found on legacy credit cards. have. A number of sensing elements or sensing element species (e.g., a CCD or photodetection layer and a magnetic-input or reading layer) detect the shape or pattern and the processing software located in the modules and modules may detect various layers, When matching, for example, information received by a CCD (virtual input) layer and a magnetic-input (magnetic read) layer, the card 100 provides a significant improvement in data transmission. Card 100 provides this significant improvement by analyzing multiple sensor inputs or multiple sensor inputs of a pixel stack.

[0082] Wherein the pixel stack is a plurality of pixel elements that overlap in a direction perpendicular to the substrate (z direction), wherein the plurality of pixel elements comprise at least one pixel element having an output or transmission function, and at least one pixel element That is, pixel elements of different species. The pixel stack is positioned on the substrate, e.g., at a location having x and y coordinates, with reference to Figures 9A-9E. The pixel layer includes pixel elements, each of which may be part of a pixel stack arranged over a plane in the x and y directions. The pixel layer planes are spaced apart from the substrate plane extending through the substrate. The substrate plane is positioned at the core or center of the card 100, e.g., the substrate 170 shown in FIG. 7B. In an exemplary embodiment, all of the pixel elements of the pixel layer may provide the same functionality, or in other embodiments, they may provide different functions. Pixel stacks are functional portions of adjacent layers overlapping in the direction transverse to the substrate plane or in the z-axis, but each pixel stack can be described as an individual unit for clarity of explanation. Each pixel element of the pixel stack can function separately. The operation of each pixel layer may be in a portion of the pixel layer or across the entire pixel layer. The advantages of positioning the pixel elements in a stack configuration include reduction of communications and power connections with respect to quality, length, and material consumption that reduce costs, i. E., Manufacturing costs and material costs.

[0083] In the exemplary embodiments described herein, the "adjacent" pixel layers may be in direct contact with each other, i.e., each layer may physically contact one another.

[0084] As described herein, the pixel stack appears in the same longitudinal and transverse, or "x" and "y, " positions when viewing the card 100 in plan view (see Fig. The collation of these inputs may be performed individually or simultaneously by timing or clocking various inputs. For example, the card 100 may receive optical data correlated to specific magnetic data, and the card 100 may receive complementary data (e.g., data from the respective sensor sources (e.g., the light detection layer and the magnetic- and may receive complementary data. In one exemplary embodiment, the multiple sensor inputs may function as an electronic watermark of a type that enables the card 100 to recognize the legitimacy of the source data. In another exemplary embodiment, one sensor source may provide information about how to interpret data from the second sensor source. For example, the optical data received by the optical detection layer may provide decoding information to the magnetic-input layer. If the data received by both layers is not properly complementary or properly decoded, card 100 may be aware of spoof or attempted spam and may prevent any further actions. Card 100 may also independently communicate via wireless or wireline communication that an attempt to spoof, spam or hack the card 100 has been made so that a financial entity or other responsible entity or individual can access the card 100 May be enabled to remotely shut down the system. In addition to the enhanced security provided by the multiple sensors or input layers to the card 100, the output elements, such as the magnetic-output and display, can be controlled according to what the sensors detect, Can be managed. In an exemplary embodiment, when ambient conditions require additional illumination, the LEDs may emit light, which may include infrared or ultraviolet light, and the CCD may detect this. The CDD can also provide additional light in terms of lighting conditions by determining the daytime from nighttime and adjusting the emission of the light-emitting pixel elements 107 (e.g., Figures 4A-4D). To provide light for detection by the plurality of light receiving / detecting pixel elements 148, the light emitting pixel elements 107 are arranged to provide some overlap in the operation of the light receiving / detecting pixel elements 148 Can be cloaked. The first optical detection unit 126, the second optical detection unit 128, the video encoder 130, or the processor 110, or other processor, monitors the saturation levels of the optical detection level elements 148, To provide this information to the video decoder 110 or the video decoder 120 to determine the output intensity and / or the intensity of the light emitting pixel elements 107 to prevent or reduce supersaturation or blooming of the light detecting pixel elements 148. [ Or dynamically and automatically adjust the time of operation.

[0085] Each of the first magnetic input unit 132 and the second magnetic input unit 133 is connected to a corresponding local side or face locus of the card 100 in the vicinity, Can be detected. Magnetic-input detection can be provided by micro-miniature layer deposition techniques. For example, a stressed material such as doped silica or doped quartz, such as lead zirconate titanate, adjacent to an unstressed material is laid out in the array, and the stressed material is stressed When an unattached material is affected by the magnetic field, it will change its electrical value. In another example, magnetically sensitive piezoelectric crystals that permit significant transmission of light through it and change resistance or current in response to the magnetic field can be deposited or etched on the surface of the card 100 of the array. A variable resistor or current generates a signal that can be processed, e.g., digitally, to provide specific information about the received magnetic field, including any data embedded in the magnetic field.

[0086] Each of the first magnetic-output unit 134 and the second magnetic-output unit 135 may be configured to transfer data between, for example, the magnetic sensors of the tether I / O device or other user device and the card 100 main surface May be comprised of arrays of magnetic-output pixels distributed over one or more major surfaces of the card 100 that may be controlled to generate localized fields. The "major surfaces" herein are the outermost substantially planar surfaces of the card 100 facing in opposite or opposite directions. Because of the relatively thin nature of the card 100, the terms side and surface can be used as synonyms unless otherwise stated, and the sides, surfaces and front represent the areas where the various sensor layers and pixel stacks are arrayed . The first magnetic-output unit 134 and / or the second magnetic-output unit 135 are not limited to any particular position on the main surface of the card 100, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > magnetic < / RTI > Thus, the first magnetic-output unit 134 or the second magnetic-output unit 135 can be used to generate magnetic data readable by legacy and future card readers. These features are described in more detail below.

[0087] Because the arrays of pixels of the first and second magnetically-output units 134 and 135 can occupy an area at least substantially coincident with the entire major surface of the card 100 in a plan view, the stripe position May be pre-programmed or generated if desired based on the sensed activity. For example, the magnetic stripe may be increased forwardly and rearwardly, substantially extending over the entire major surface of the card 100, and may also be held invisibly on the surface, since the layer on which the magnetic elements are positioned is the magnetic Because it is below the other layers that are not affected by the fields. When a legacy device, such as a legacy magnetic stripe reader, is used, the card 100 may be placed in any position and orientation below a substantial portion of the surface or side of the card 100 that enables reading by the reader's magnetic read head. And can adapt and communicate striped data that can be auto-positioned. For example, the stripe may be positioned along one side of the card 100 in a manner similar to or mimic a conventional card or debit card. The reader may be a legacy POS card reader or other card 100 functioning as a POS system. In one embodiment, the card-to-card POS system communicates with the magnetic stripe data based on the handshake of the display-to-display according to the pattern established by the first display handshake for a fixed location of the point- can do. Thus, anyone holding the card 100 can use it as a portable POS system.

[0088] In the context of this disclosure, the term handshake refers to recognizing the access of a device or card 100, determining whether the device or card 100 is functional and transmitting data, If appropriate, transmission of data is permitted. The handshake function can be used to communicate with near field communication (NFC) devices such as RFID and magnetic data emitters, communication with Wi-Fi, properly coded or encoded audible or sound emissions, At both wavelengths of poetry, optical communication through quantum entangled devices (QEDs) and other systems for establishing a communication link, and combinations of two or more systems and methods, can be extended. In an exemplary embodiment, a handshake between the card 100 and another individual card 100 or another device or system may initially require a data query from the individual card 100 or another device or system. Thereafter, the card 100 advises the user that a query has been received. The user may then provide a specific phrase or codeword that informs the card 100 of the characteristics of the handshake and communication link and provide restrictions on the link such as from the card 100 to another card 100, It may communicate to the card 100 to provide the types of data that are acceptable to be transmitted to the device or system.

[0089] Card 100 receives a sound or voice signal from either the first micro-speaker pixel array 138 or the second micro-speaker array 140 (e.g., piezoelectric arrays), encodes the signal, Sound / haptic codec 136 configured to provide voice / sound signals to the processor 110 via the bus 108. The sound / The sound / voice / haptic codec 136 receives the coded sound, voice, or haptic data from the processor 110 via the bus 108, decodes the data, And generates a signal for the speaker pixel array 140. Thus, the micro-speaker pixel arrays 138, 140 can provide the functionality of a microphone, speaker, or haptic feedback device to at least some minimum range.

[0090] The authentication unit 142 of the card 100 is connected to the card 100 in the embodiment which can be transmitted to the card / user authentication unit 230 of the server 200 for authentication of the card 100 and / ) And the identity information about the user (described in more detail below). In another embodiment, the card 100 may store biometric authentication data for login authentication to an acceptable extent by a security scheme, card processing power, and / or card memory capacity. As will be described in detail later, a plurality of physical characteristics, such as fingerprints, capillary blood vessels patterns, pulses and micro-pulse patterns, gates, and retina or iris prints, Can be used. In addition, the account number, expiration date, PIN number, password and other card information and indication may be transmitted from the authentication unit 142 of the card 100 to the card / user authentication of the server 200 for the authentication card 100 in encrypted form Unit 230. < / RTI >

[0091] The location unit 144 is a positioning unit, such as a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver. The location unit 144 may be located on the substrate 170 of the card 100 either on the substrate 170 between the substrate 170 and the light detection pixel layer or light detection layer 186a or 186b, May be positioned at other positions that will allow operation of other portions of the card 100. The location information determined by the location unit 144 is transmitted to the server 200 where it may be utilized by one or more systems such as the value analysis unit 232 and the tracking unit 236, System applications are described in detail later in this disclosure. Alternatively, the location of the card 100 may be determined by using manual input by the user, by using multivariate measurements of radio signals, such as those received from cellular networks, or by knowing their individual locations, Lt; / RTI > can be derived through integration into other electronic devices that may share the same.

[0092] The power supply 112 transfers power to the system elements of the card 100, e.g., the system elements shown in FIG. The power supply 112 may supply power from any of a number of sources. For example, in addition to the known RFID powering mechanisms, there is a known method pioneered by Intel, such as transferring wireless power to fixed inductors provided in the card 100 and transferring power through capacitive coupling, Lt; / RTI > Of course, the card 100 may also be mounted with its own battery, such as a battery "layer ", and a thin film or ultra thin rechargeable lithium ion or lithium polymer battery, for example, Accordingly, it will fit within the proposed form factor or any larger form factor.

[0093] The power supply 112 of the card 100 may be connected to the power supply 112 such that the power management unit is included as a separate unit from the power supply 112 and may be communicatively coupled to the power supply 112, Unit. ≪ / RTI > For example, the embodiment may include a power saving mode in which the display only operates in a monochrome power saving mode. Embodiments may include elements for determining whether to turn off one of the first or second light emitting units 122, 124 (i.e., dual display units), turn off both, or turn off some of them . In fact, the main surfaces have the ability to emit light, but in many cases it is unnecessary to emit light from both surfaces and the processor 110 identifies when only a single surface needs to emit light And therefore the card 100 is adapted with respect to the need to consume energy. For example, an embodiment of the card 100 may be used to identify features or illumination levels of an image sensed by a tilt sensor, such as a micro-electromagnetics or MEMS accelerometer, and first and second optical detection units 126 and 128 And may include recognition software that can control the detected orientation, the recognized feature, or the power that can be provided in accordance with the detected illumination. For example, the card 100 may include applications that automatically orient any display or operate an application in a particular orientation, and may be generated from tilt and / or accelerometer data. Orientation applications may also determine which processor 110 of card 100 recognizes from the card's light collection input (e.g., light detection at the CCD of light detection units 126 and / or 128) Can be determined.

[0094] In an embodiment, the magnetic stripes are provided on the card 100. In an embodiment, the magnetic stripe is positioned between the major surfaces of the card 100 such that the magnetic stripe is "buried " and is not visible on the major surfaces of the card 100. One or more Excess magnetic stripes may include account information that can be read / written by card readers / programmers, for example, according to ISP / IEC 7811, ISO / IEC 7813, and ISO / IEC 4909 standards or otherwise disclosed herein, May be programmed to include information such as identification information (e.g., driver's license, credit card, identification card, security access card), monetary value (e.g., fare cards, gift cards, virtual currency) Magnetic stripes can be created in four positions (see Figures 3B and 5) to produce a card orientation in any card orientation relative to the reader (e.g., the reader's slot) Allows for unplanned insertion of the card 100 into a wipe or slotted reader and allows a single action to be "taken" whenever possible, regardless of the orientation of the card 100 during swipe or insertion into the reader. ) May be backwards compatible with the earlier technology of the magnetic swipe so that any "magnetic swipe" or slot insertion type is immediately compatible. The rear magnetic stripe material may be the data found on the stripe under the control of the system 1 May be micro-miniaturized magnetic recording heads to erase and rewrite.

[0095] In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 2, card 100 includes a plurality of processors, such as a processor or controller 110, a video encoder 120, a video encoder 130, and a codec 130. The arrangement of processors, however, is not limited so long as all of the processors are integrated into a single processor or other processor of the card 100 that performs the functions of the processor 110 or the speed at which the card 100 is required to perform various functions, May differ from the description herein in that it may include additional processors or controllers, depending on the cost of the processors or controllers.

[0096] The configuration of the card 100 described herein provides a compact, relatively thin, flat multifunction computer that includes at least one sensor input, at least one emitter or transmitter, and display functionality. The compact nature of the card 100 and its ability to form layers of pixel elements allows the card 100 to be relatively inexpensive and lightweight as an alternative to other electronic devices.

[0097] Figures 3A-3C are diagrams of an exemplary embodiment of card 100. Fig. 3A is a perspective view of the card, Fig. 3B is a plan view of the card, and Fig. 3C is a side view of the card 100. Fig. As can be seen in Figures 3A-3C, the card 100 includes a first main side, a front or surface 101, a second main side, a front or surface 102, a first physical port 103a, Two physical ports 103b, and a plurality of magnetic stripes 104. [

[0098] Figure 3a includes a first major surface 101, a second major surface 102, and physical ports 103a and 103b and extends from a first major side, front or surface 101 to a second side, 0.0 > 100 < / RTI > showing the side or edge surface 105 extending to the side 102 of the card. The first major surface 101 includes or covers the intermixed array 106a and the second major surface 102 includes or covers the intermixed array 106b. The intermixed array includes at least two different array units, including, but not limited to, a light emitting unit, a light detecting unit, a magnetic input unit, a magnetic output unit, and a micro-speaker array. The intermixed arrays may be constructed as planar arrays, or as stacked or vertically-extending arrays. Each array unit includes a plurality of independently controlled pixels.

[0099] In the top view of Figure 3b, each magnetic stripe 104 is shown in phantom because each magnetic stripe 104 is positioned on the outer front and back (primary) surfaces (i.e., the first and second Main surfaces 101 and 102), and therefore "non-visible." In another embodiment, the magnetic layer is in the area defined by the periphery of the major surfaces 101, 102 of the card 100 in plan view, while the magnetic stripes 104 are the programmable strip areas shown as separate strips. In which case the strip regions are virtual regions that can be programmed and programmed as needed, as needed. In addition to being able to program the magnetic-output pixels to emulate the magnetic stripe 104, the magnetic-output pixels provide directionality to the magnetic-output data, so that the card 100 that interfaces with the magnetic readers And may be operable to increase adaptive power.

[0100] 3C is a side view of an exemplary card 100 including a first physical port 103a and a second physical port 103b. In an embodiment, the physical port 103a and the physical port 103b have different configurations, such as IEEE 1394 interface, USB (universal serial bus) port, or other interface type physical port. The physical ports should be as close as possible to accommodate improved bad weather resistance, better compliance with the credit card form factor, and resistance to dust, liquid water, or water vapor that can cause degradation of the internal components of the card 100 To a large extent, or may be completely excluded in some embodiments.

[0101] FIGS. 4A-4D are top views of pixel elements that may be used in intermixed arrays of cards 100. FIG. FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary arrangement of the display pixels of the array of light emitting pixels 107, or of the first and second light emitting units 122, 124. FIG. 4B shows an exemplary arrangement of the pixels of the first and second photodetector units 126, 128 or the photodetecting elements (e.g., CCD MOS diodes) being arranged. Figures 4C and 4D illustrate, in an exemplary embodiment, portions of the intermixed planar array 99a and the intermixed planar array 99b provided on a substrate, e.g., substrate 170 shown in Figure 5. Figure 4c illustrates a perspective view of a card 100 (100) showing an exemplary embodiment of intermixed planar arrays 99a, 99b that includes both light emitting elements 107 and light detecting elements 148 arranged on the portion shown. ) Of the main surfaces 101, Figure 4d illustrates an array (not shown) including a plurality of magnetic output pixels 109, magnetic input pixels 150, piezoelectric-input pixels 111, and piezoelectric-output pixels 113 Illustrate exemplary intermixing arrays 99a, 99b that include additional types of (pixel) elements. Each of the additional pixel elements is arranged along each side of the substrate 170, along with the light-emitting pixel elements 107 and the light-detecting pixel elements 148. The intermixed arrangement shown in Figure 4d is exemplary and differently arranged, the pixel elements being arranged, the more or fewer types of arranged pixel elements, or the lesser types of arranged pixel elements being different and different from each other It will be understood that the invention may be practiced otherwise than as described. It should be appreciated that each light emitting pixel element 107 may include more than one component, for example color light emission (e.g., using green, blue and red sub-pixels, but also operating in a monochromatic mode) Of light emitters and that the different types of pixels of the intermixed array can be arranged with the same or different densities.

[0102] FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional diagram taken along lines 5-5 of FIG. 3B and shows details of an embodiment of card 100. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the card 100 includes a substrate 170 that includes electronic elements of the card 100. The previously described intermixed arrays are formed on the first major surface 171a of the substrate 170 in the first and second stack directions, which are perpendicular to the surfaces 171a and 171b, And the second major surface 171b. The first intermixed array 106a is provided adjacent the second major surface 171a in the first stack direction; The second mixed interconnect array 106b is provided adjacent to the second major surface 171b in a second stack direction opposite to the first stack direction.

[0103] The first cover structure 174a and the second structure 174b provide a water-free and dust-free environment for the intermixed array portions 106a and 106b To cover and seal against each of the major surfaces 171a and 171b. The first cover structure 174a and the second cover structure 174b may also have a first cover structure 174a or a second cover structure 174b and a first cover structure 174a or a second cover structure 174b, Space and gap for the object, which is the distance from the interior of the first intermixed array 174b to the outermost layers of the first intermixed array 106a or the second intermixed array 106b, Build, provide, or position as close as possible to the antenna elements 106a and 106b. In an exemplary embodiment, the thicknesses of the first cover structure 174a and the second cover structure 174b are approximately the same. Additionally, in an exemplary embodiment, light emitted from the light-emitting pixel elements 107 to be reflected from an object outside of the first cover structure 174a and the second cover structure 174b is incident on the light- A small gap 178 is formed between the intermixed arrays 106a and 106b and the inner surfaces of the first cover structure 174a and the second cover structure 174b, respectively, / RTI > For example, the card 100 may detect fingerprints by one or more sensor elements, e.g., photodetection pixel elements 148. The fingerprints can be detected at a distance from the first cover structure 174a or the second cover structure 174b or directly on the first cover structure 174a or the second cover structure 174b.

[0104] 5, cover structures 174a and 174b may each be, in the exemplary embodiment, a card cover structure, such as cover structures 174a and 174b, which may be bezel type covering structures May include additional support elements at, for example, the edges of the card 100, and may include alignment / support structures to assist in the support and alignment of the cover structures, but the individual first and second intermix array portions < Is a bezel-less molded single layer that covers and encapsulates the layers 106a and 106b. The cover structures 174a and 174b are configured to transmit light from the light emitting elements of the first and second light emitting units 122 and 124 to the first and second light detecting units 126 and 128, And transparent portions that allow light transmission from outside the card 100. The cover structures 174a and 174b may also include a conductive portion that may be formed, for example, by embedding conductive materials in one or both of the cover structures 174a and 174b. These conductive portions provide electrical connection from the exterior portions of the cover structures 174a and / or 174b to the interior portions of the cover structures 174a and / or 174b. These electrical connections may be for a charging connection from a dock or charging device, a data connection, or other purposes, for example. By providing an embedded connection in the form of a metal portion having a minimum portion exposed to the outside of the cover structure 174a or 174b and by providing a connection to the inner wires, components or layers of the card 100 , Depending on the type of material used for the conductive portion (s), corrosion may be minimized or eliminated.

[0105] In the embodiment shown in Figure 5, the magnetic stripes 104a, 104b are preferably provided inside the cover structure 174a on or near the major surface 171a of the substrate 170; The magnetic stripes 104c and 104d are preferably provided inside the cover structure 174b on or near the main surface of the substrate 171b. In another embodiment, film strips of magnetic stripe are not provided because the function of one or more magnetic strips can be programmed to generate any field associated with any type card, such as first and second magnetic - output units 134 and 135. In this case, Other embodiments may include one or more of the magnetic-output units and the magnetic stripe for the level of redundancy.

[0106] 6 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a substrate 170 that may include a plurality of electronic devices used to operate the card 100 and that may serve to provide strength and an acceptable amount of rigidity to the card 100. [ In an embodiment, the substrate 170 comprises a processor 110; A power supply 112 including a battery 180, e.g., a thin film / ultra thin lithium ion or lithium polymer battery, and a power management device 182; Memory 114; A communication unit 118; antenna; And other devices such as tilt sensors, accelerometers (not shown), and / or other electronic elements. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the substrate 170 may be connected to at least one serial interface or physical port (see FIGS. 3A and 3C) (although the card 100 embodiments may abandon the inclusion of any physical ports E.g., USB, IEEE 1394, etc.). The electronic devices included in the substrate 170 may be embedded within the substrate 170, included in the recessed regions, or surface mounted on the substrate 170. Substrate 170 may be used to interconnect electronic devices with substrate 170 and to provide wire traces, multi-layer wiring, and through holes (not shown) adjacent first and second intermixing array portions 106a, .

[0107] 6 shows a pair of charge receiving contacts or charging electrodes 184 for charging the battery 180 of the card 100. As shown in Fig. Charge receiving contacts 184 may be arranged such that charging contacts 184 may be arranged in other ways, e.g., elsewhere in the periphery of card 100, but as in the case of conventional smart card contacts conforming to ISO standards But may be positioned along the sides of the card 100 so as not to disturb the display area, and may also be used to transfer data to and from the device. The power management device 182 receives the voltage / current applied to the charge receiving contacts 184 and controls the charging function for the battery 180 and / or the conditioning of the power signal used to operate the card 100. [ do. For example, the card 100 may be placed in a charging stand (not shown) that includes a pair of charging transmission electrodes such that each receiving electrode contacts the individual charging electrodes to charge the battery. Alternatively, the card 100 may include a "contactless" type battery charging subsystem including a coil or a capacitive charging plate so that the card 100 may be placed on a charging surface comprising a complementary charging coil or capacitor electrode .

[0108] 7A and 7B show more details of the card 100 according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein FIG. 7A shows a top view of a portion of the first major surface 101 and FIG. 7B taken along lines 7B-7B of Fig. 7B, the card 100 includes substantially identical intermix arrays 106a and 106b provided on opposing sides or sides of the substrate 170 on individual multi-layer stacks S1 and S2. In an embodiment, each multilayer stack S1 and S2 comprises a plurality of layered arrays. The multilayer stack S1 includes a photodetector layer 186a, a magnetic-output pixel layer, or a photodetector layer that extends "vertically" starting from the layer closest to the substrate 170 and away from the substrate 170 in the & Output layer 190a, a magnetic-input pixel layer or a magnetic-input layer 192a, a piezoelectric-input pixel layer or a piezoelectric-input layer 194a, a piezoelectric-output pixel layer or a piezoelectric-output layer 196a, And a light emitting pixel layer or a light emitting layer 198a. The light emitting layer 198 may include a plurality of LEDs 193 as a light source. The multilayer stack S2 starts with a layer closest to the substrate 170 and includes a photodetector layer 186b, a magnetic-output layer 190b, a magnetic-input layer 192b, a piezoelectric-input layer 194b, An output layer 196b, and a light-emitting layer 198b. It will be appreciated that the various layers of substrate 170 and stacks S1 and S2 are not shown to scale to illustrate layered structures.

[0109] The light detection layer 186a of the multi-layer stack S1 includes an array of light receiving / detecting pixels arranged in a light sensing material, which is part of the first light detecting unit 126 described hereinabove. The photodetection layer 186b of the multi-layer stack S2 includes arranged light receiving / detecting pixels of photodetecting material, which is part of the second photodetection unit 128 previously described herein. In an embodiment, the first and second light detecting layers 186a and 186b may be used as an optical detection layer, although other optical array technologies such as CMOS (complementary metal oxide, semiconductor) chips, photodiode array (PDA) , And CCDs. The light receiving / detecting pixels 148 are arranged on each of the surfaces of the backlit light detecting layers 186a and 186b with the substrate 170 corresponding to a plurality of individual pinholes or optical transmission paths 187a and 187b.

[0110] 7A and 7B, each optical transmission path 187a is formed between the pinhole or pinhole opening 188a of the upper surface of the multilayer stack and the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 of the light detecting layer 186a . Each optical transmission path 187a and 187b extends from the outer surface of the pixel stack to the light detection layers 186a and 186b, respectively. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, each optical transmission path 187a extends from the outer surface 191a to a plurality of pixel layers and terminates in the light detection layer 186a. Each pinhole opening 188a and each associated optical transmission path 187a are positioned at "intersections" or corners of the pixel stacks, as shown in FIG. 7A. Thus, each optical transmission path 187a is positioned around one or more pixel stacks, rather than extending through the pixel stack. This arrangement is similar to the pinhole opening 188b and the optical transmission path 187b. 7b, due to the position, arrangement and orientation of the optical transmission paths 187a and 187b, the optical transmission path 187a includes a light-emitting layer 198a, a piezoelectric-output layer 196a, a piezoelectric- Is formed in and extends through the input layer 194a, the magnetic-input layer 192a, and the magnetic-output layer 190a and is formed adjacent to the light-detecting layer 186a, on the light-detecting layer 186a, And extend from the first intermixed array 106a to terminate or stop at a position immediately adjacent to the detection layer 186a. Thus, pinhole passages 187a and 187b extend through the at least one pixel layer to a spaced distance or depth from the outer surface 191a to the photodetection layer 186a. A pinhole 188b and a pinhole passage 187b are similarly formed on the second side 102 of the card 100. [

[0111] In operation, light incident on the surface 101 of the transmissive first cover structure 174a is transmitted through a pinhole-type orifice that allows light to enter the light transmission path 187a through the first cover structure 174a. And the transmitted light travels to the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 of the light detecting layer 186a in the direction of the arrows 189a. Similarly, the light incident on the surface 102 of the transmissive second cover structure 174b is transmitted through the second cover structure 174b as a pinhole-type orifice that allows light to enter the light transmission passages 187b And the transmitted light is transmitted to the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 of the light detecting layer 186b in the direction of the arrows 189b. For each pixel 148 of the first and second photo-detection layers 186a and 186b, a gap between the cover structure 174a and the first photo-detection layer 186a and between the cover structure 174a and the second photo- 188b and the corresponding optical transmission paths 187a, 187b are not provided, although other transmission media may be used between the first optical detection layer 186a and the second optical detection layer 186b.

[0112] It will be clear from the previous discussion of the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B that the various pixel layers and, consequently, the various pixels of the pixel layers are positioned or positioned to provide the advantage of unobstructed operation. The light emitting pixel layers 198a and 198b are the outermost layers and the photodetecting pixel layers 186a and 186b are the deepest or innermost pixel layers and thus are spaced apart from the light emitting pixel layers 198a and 198b, Which means that the light emitting pixel layers 198a and 198b are positioned farther away from the plane extending through the substrate 170 than the light detecting pixel layers 186a and 186b. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, a plurality of additional pixel layers are positioned between the light-emitting pixel layers 198a and 198b and the light-detecting pixel layers 186a and 186b. For example, the magnetic-output pixel layer 190a, the magnetically-input pixel layer 192a, the piezo-input pixel layer 194a, and the piezo-output pixel layer 196a may be disposed between the photodetection pixel layer 186a and the light- Layer 198a. ≪ / RTI > 7B, a piezoelectric-output pixel layer 196a is positioned between the piezo-input pixel layer 194a and the light-emitting layer 198a, and the magnetic-input pixel layer 192a is positioned between the piezo-input pixel layer 194a and the light- Is positioned between the magnetic-output pixel layer 190a and the light-emitting pixel layer 198a. In addition, a piezoelectric-input pixel layer 194a and a piezoelectric-output pixel layer 196a are positioned between the magnetic-output pixel layer 190a and the light-emitting layer 198a.

[0113] The light incident on each light receiving / detecting pixel 148 is converted by the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 into a gray scale value, i.e. a monochrome input, a color value, e.g., red, green, or blue, Or an electrical value representing the ultraviolet ray value. The processor 110 or other image processor, which is positioned on the card 100, reads each light receiving / detecting pixel 148 and assembles an image from each of the pixels. The image may then be processed to improve the clarity of the image or to remove noise or other analytical techniques to improve other advantages, such as improving contrast, color balance, and the like. Card 100 may also limit acquisition of optical data for a particular wavelength, depending on application and user-defined settings. If the image has been processed, the image may be analyzed at the processor 110 to evaluate the content of the image. For example, the image may present a fingerprint, a keyed Kirlian image, a gesture, or a facial expression. In an exemplary embodiment, the user may move the card 100 to the vicinity of the object, and the card 100 may scan the object and process the received images to form a three-dimensional representation of the object. In another exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may be positioned in a lens or lens assembly to provide a larger field of view for the holes 188a and / or 188b to provide a digital It may be possible to collect more visible information in a manner similar to cameras.

[0114] The magnetic output layer 190a and the magnetic output layer 190b form portions of the first magnetic input unit 132 and the second magnetic input unit 133 respectively and are arranged in the same pattern as those found on the card magnetic stripe Magnetic field generators that include addressable pixel arrays that can be used to form magnetic fields or to form portions of a magnetic transmitter that can communicate with a reading device such as a card reader or other card. As described previously herein, the pixels of the first and second magnetic output units 134 and 135 coincide with planes having at least substantially the entire individual principal plane, front or surface 101 and 102 May be occupied or arranged on it, and the virtual stripes may be programmable to be derived. This programmability means that any portion of the magnetic-output pixels 109 is programmed to form a shape other than the stripes at any position available on the card 100. [ For security, the embodiment allows these virtual stripes to be programmed (activated) "timely " when the user is present at the POS reader and the" immediately after use "program is removed and deactivated. In an embodiment, the virtual stripes may be generated based on gestures or other information associated with the movement of the card 100. [ For example, when swiping the card 100 through a POS or other reader, the user may hold the card 100 at an angle that is not readable by the reader. Card 100 may learn and determine the patterns associated with sweeping and may determine the orientation of card 100 when sweeping is initiated. Card 100 may be configured to use preferences to match the magnetic stripe data to the displayed virtual card. For example, the user may select a particular virtual card from a plurality of virtual cards for use, and the magnetic data reading is automatically matched with the account associated with the selected virtual card. Before moving through the sensors of the reader, the card 100 may create a stripe at a location across the portion of the surface of the card 100 readable by the reader "timely " (Or to a standard position). In this way, the reader will suffer fewer unsuccessful card swipes, and the user will experience less complication problems due to the use of the card 100.

[0115] Card 100 may also include the ability to automatically increase power levels during a swipe to increase assurance of magnetic data communication. For example, during a single swipe operation, which may be a static swipe or a dynamic swipe (i.e., card 100 movement through fixed position or reader with data programmed in just in time), card 100 May provide a plurality of power levels for the magnetic-output data provided by the magnetic-output pixels 109. This data may also be provided in both directions so that any orientation of the card 100 can be used to interface with the magnetic reader. A value with a plurality of magnetic-output power levels is for interfacing with legacy card readers having varying levels of sensitivity. Magnetic read heads are variable in their ability to read magnetic data. Some read heads are relatively sensitive, and other, especially long-used read heads are relatively insensitive and variable power levels provide an improved opportunity to guarantee data transmission.

[0116] The magnetic input layer 192a and the magnetic input layer 192b form portions of the magnetic input unit 132 and the second magnetic input unit 133 respectively and the corresponding card major surfaces 101 and 102 are affected And addressable pixel arrays that can be used to sense a magnetic field. The magnetic input layer 192a and the magnetic input layer 192b may be formed of a thin film, for example, any suitable magnetic sensitive layer that can be formed as a composite magnetostrictive and piezoelectric material exhibiting a pre-magnetic effect. These materials include doped silicon crystals, including silicon or silicon dioxide crystals and titanium dioxide crystals.

[0117] In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, various pixels that may be referred to as directly overlapping pixel elements are arranged and configured in vertically extending pixel stacks 98, Which means that the positions of the pixel elements of the stack 98 substantially coincide in the x-direction and the y-direction in the top view of the pixel stack 98. 7B, each pixel stack 98 includes a light-emitting pixel element 107, a piezoelectric-output pixel element (not shown), a deepest or innermost pixel element from the outermost or shallowest pixel element, 113, a piezoelectric-input pixel element 111, a magnetic-input pixel element 150, a magnetic-output pixel element 109, and a photodetection pixel element 148. Each pixel element is selectively and independently controllable and has at least an on or active state or mode and an off or inactive state or mode. Some pixel elements, e.g., piezoelectric-output pixel element 113, have a controllable intensity. Some pixel elements, e.g., photodetection pixel elements 148, may have controllable sensitivity.

[0118] The piezoelectric-input layer 194a and the piezoelectric-output layer 196a form portions of the first micro-speaker pixel array 138 and the piezoelectric-input layer 194b and the piezoelectric-output layer 196b form portions of the first micro- To form portions of the micro-speaker pixel array 140. By using different materials for the microphone and the speaker, the speaker and the microphone can each be biased differently and operated in a full duplex mode (simultaneously) using digital signal processing techniques such as echo and noise cancellation. In addition, the algorithm for the pixel arrays of the piezo-input layers 194a, 194b may be directed towards the identified source location through the light receiving / detecting pixels 148 of a particular source, e.g., the light detection layer 186a or 186b Allowing virtual microphones capable of manipulating individual lobs of virtual polarity patterns of the microphone. In another embodiment, a single layer of piezoelectric material may form piezoelectric-input / output pixels 111/113 that provide the functionality of the microphone and the function of the speaker in the half-duplex mode. In other embodiments, the pixels of the piezoelectric-output layers 196a and 196b may be used to alert the user, in response to a corresponding manipulation of the card 100 by the user, or otherwise to notify the user of events, communications, It is possible to provide haptic feedback to specific areas of the card 100.

[0119] In embodiments of the card 100 having piezoelectric pixels or devices on one or both of the major surfaces of the card 100, the card 100 may be used as a microphone and a speaker through one or both surfaces of the card 100 Can operate. This particular ability can be used for voice generation (such as logging into speech recognition) and alerts < RTI ID = 0.0 > and / or < / RTI > alerts for use in various dawn radiation and acquisition applications, Sounding can be provided. However, due to the form of the card, the power and fidelity of radiation and collection may be limited to some extent in its use due to power limitations and surface flatness. Stabilizing and placing two cards 100 in close proximity can still use the sound as one of the means of handshaking and data passing. As the light emitting pixel elements 107 (e.g., LEDs) and the light receiving / detecting elements 148 (e.g., CCD elements) are dispersed, the piezoelectric devices are dispensed as pixels 111 and 113 the sound emitted and collected by the piezoelectric-input pixels 111 and the piezoelectric-output pixels 113 due to the disburse of one or several of the piezoelectric-input pixels 111 and the piezoelectric-output pixels 113 provides real or actual communications Trojans communications that safely protect emissions and collections can include many sounds, radios, and collections that can be loaded. As used herein, "trojan" means wrong and is not used at the receiving end. This dynamic can emulate a conventional audio modem function in a relatively slow fashion and can be implemented as an element of the card 100 as an integrated element of two cards 100, Forms a data transmission method in which dynamics can be added for communication between one card 100 that is mounted on the card 100 or another machine that is mounted on the card 100. [ In addition, the light emitter pixels 107 (e.g., LED) and light receiving / detecting pixels 148 (e.g., CCD elements), piezoelectric pixel elements 111 and 113, As shown in FIG.

[0120] The pixels of the piezo-input layer 194a and the piezo-input layer 194b are also configured to detect biometric authentication data, such as pressure fluctuations that represent pulses (heart rate) due to the finger touching the major surface of the card 100 .

[0121] The light-emitting layer 198a and the light-emitting layer 198b form portions of the first light-emitting unit 122 and the second light-emitting unit 124, respectively, and independently addressable light emitting elements or pixels 107 (E.g., LED, OLED, LCD, etc.). Although not shown, the first light emitting unit 122 and the second light emitting unit 124 process the decoded video data from one or more controllers, image processors, and video decoder 120, And / or driver modules that display decoded and processed data on the first and / or second major sides, fronts, or surfaces of the display device 100.

[0122] Output layer 190a, the magnetic-output layer 190b, the magnetic-input layer 192a, the magnetic-input layer 192b, and the magnetic-input layer 192b, although not shown in Figures 7a and 7b, Output layer 196a, a piezoelectric-output layer 196b, a light-emitting layer 198a, and a light-emitting layer 198b, as shown in Fig. 1 (a), a piezoelectric-input layer 194a, a piezoelectric-input layer 194b, Each of which includes electrode pairs, wherein each of the electrodes is connected to row and column electrodes capable of individually and / or independently addressing or controlling a particular pixel and / or pixel species for sensing and / or emission . Such control may include pixel address or position in the array of independent pixel elements, on state, off state, sensitivity, intensity or level of emission or output, operating time, and the like. Other individual pixel elements described herein, such as RFID antennas or receivers, are similarly addressable and controllable. The electrodes of the pixel elements may be transparent to allow light transmission therethrough, for example thin layers of metals such as ITO (indium tin oxide) or silver. Additionally, although the figures do not show interlayer insulators, there are such layers between the layers of the stack where electrical isolation and isolation are required, for example between adjacent stacked row / row lines in stacks S1 and S2 will be. As the various pixel elements described herein are made thin enough to provide minimal attenuation to light and / or to provide minimal attenuation to light and thus to substantially transparent materials, light emission and / Detection pixel elements can be positioned behind or below other pixel elements in the z-direction with minimal effect on performance. If the light attenuation across the stack of pixel elements that allows light to pass therethrough is unacceptably high, then the light emitting pixels and / or light receiving pixel elements are higher in the pixel stack, i.e., across the plane of the pixel layer and may be moved or positioned further away from the substrate in the z-direction. Alternatively, pinhole passages may provide a path for light to reach the deeper pixel elements closer to the substrate.

[0123] Figures 7a and 7b illustrate one advantage of stacking pixel elements along the z-direction for forming a pixel stack. Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a much higher possible maximum density than previously known techniques for detection and transmission elements per unit surface area. In one embodiment disclosed herein, since each side or side of the card 100 includes pixel stacks and pixel layers, a single plan view position of the card 100, i.e., x-position and y-position, There are 14 functions including a plurality of techniques at the position defined by the function (e.g., see Figures 9d and 9e).

[0124] 8A and 8B are views of one embodiment of card 100a. FIG. 8A shows a top view of a portion of the first major surface 101, and FIG. 8B shows a cross-sectional view taken along lines 8B-8B in FIG. 8A. The differences between the illustrated card 100a and the card 100 are that a plurality of individual perforations or holes 388a and 388b are formed in the array of first light emitting layer 398a and second light emitting layer 398b, And a plurality of optical transmission or pinhole passages 387a and 387b provided through the optical transmission or pinhole passages 387a and 387b. The optical transmission paths 387a and 387b are arranged such that the positions of the first light emitting layer 398a and the second light emitting layer 398b are in the first intermixed array 390a and the second intermixed array 390b , It has a longer or longer depth than the length or depth of the optical transmission paths 188a and 88b. Additionally, a first photodetection layer 386a is formed on the side of the stack S2 'closer to the second cover structure 174b and on the side of the second photodetection unit 386b facing the substrate 370 And the second light detecting layer 386a is formed on the side of the stack S1 'closer to the first cover structure 174a and on the side facing the substrate 370 of the second light detecting unit 386b , The density of the light receiving / detecting pixels 148 on each side of the substrate 370 is less than the embodiments of Figures 7A and 7B. Each of the positions or arrangements of the holes 388a and 388b formed in the light emitting layers 398a and 398b may further include a light emitting layer 198a and a light emitting layer < RTI ID = 0.0 > 198b). ≪ / RTI >

[0125] In operation, incident light on the surface 101 of the transparent first cover structure 174a functions as a pinhole-type orifice through which the light enters the light transmission passages 387a through the first cover structure 174a Is transmitted to each hole 388a, and the transmitted light moves to the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 of the first detecting layer 386a in the direction of the arrows 389a. Similarly, incident light on the surface 102 of the transparent second cover structure 174b acts as a pinhole-type orifice through which the light enters the light transmission passages 387b through the second cover structure 174b Is transmitted to each hole 388b and the transmitted light travels to the light receiving / detecting pixel 148 of the light detecting layer 386b in the direction of the arrows 389b. The optical transmission paths 387a and 387b as well as the optical transmission paths 187a and 187b and the other optical transmission or pinhole paths described herein reduce the reflections from the walls of the optical transmission paths 387a and 387b Or removal of light from the substrate, which may result in blurry imaging due to off-axis incident light on each hole, aperture, or aperture 388a and 388b.

[0126] The optical transmission paths 387a and 387b over the substrate 370 are configured to receive the elements of the plurality of electronic components and devices used to operate the card 100a from the array of perforations or holes 388a and 388b To be distributed in such a way that Some or all of the elements may be distributed between the perforations 388a and 388b and / or the various electronic devices may be designed to include passages. The optical transmission paths 387a and 387b enable novel capabilities of a credit card form factor. Due to the compactness of the perforations 388a and 388b on the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102 and due to the presence of the optical transmission paths 387a and 387b which are effectively pinhole passages, Detection pixel elements 148 may be positioned behind other elements that are partially or completely opaque while providing imaging capabilities to card 100. 7B, the photodetection pixel elements 148 forming the photodetection layer 186 are formed at row and column intersections that are co-positioned to overlap or overlay one another in a plan view "Behind " the stack of pixels. More specifically, a stack of overlapped and overlaid pixels, which may also be described as being co-positioned, co-positioned, or superimposed, along the longitudinal axis at least partially transverse to the plan view, The light emitting pixel element 107 of the light-emitting layer 198a or 198b, the light-emitting pixel element 176a of the light-emitting layer 188a or 186b, Output pixel 113 of the output layer 196a or 196b, the piezoelectric-input pixel 111 of the piezoelectric-input layer 194a or 194b, the magnetic-input pixel 150 of the magnetic-input layer 192, And the magnetic-output pixels 109 of the magnetic-output layers 190a and 190b in the order described.

[0127] In the case of a plane perpendicular to the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102, that is, the plan view for the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102, an overlap appears, Need not completely cover the "under" pixel, or a pixel farther from the substrate 170 than the other in the same column or stack need not completely cover the pixel closer to the substrate 170. [ Further, in one exemplary embodiment, each pixel of the top layer may be slightly offset, staggered, or skewed from a pixel or a pixel below the substrate 170 in the upper layer . Such offsets may be due to manufacturing accuracy, or may be to provide a more direct path from a particular pixel to either the first cover structure 174a or the second cover structure 174b. In one exemplary embodiment, a stack of adjacent pixels may be viewed as pyramids when viewed from the side or edge of the card 100, and each pixel outside the substrate 170 may be viewed as being closer to the substrate 170 Pixel. ≪ / RTI > In another exemplary embodiment, each adjacent pixel is approximately the same size, and a stack of pixels appears to form a tower because the stack of pixels extends outward from the substrate 170. In yet another embodiment, each adjacent pixel in the stack or column increases in size according to the distance from the substrate 170 and appears to have a slightly inverted pyramidal shape. In a further exemplary embodiment, the width and length of the pixel stack in the x- and y-directions are defined by the largest pixel elements of the pixel stack. The pixel stack extends in a direction perpendicular to the substrate 170 so that the pixel stacks extend "vertically " farther away from the substrate 170 to form a three-dimensional pixel array, It should be apparent that the pixel stacks 98 form rows and columns, i.e., a two-dimensional pixel array, as viewed in plan view relative to the card 100, extending away from the card 100.

[0128] In the exemplary embodiment of Figures 8A and 8B, the various pixels and / or pixel elements are arranged and configured in a vertically extending pixel stack 378. In the exemplary embodiment of Figure 8B, each pixel stack 378 includes a light emitting pixel element 107, an optical detector (not shown) for the opposite surface, Output pixel element 111, a magnetically-input pixel element 150, and a magnetic-output pixel element 109, and the substrate 370 is coupled to the piezoelectric- . The photodetection pixel element 148 for the pixel stack is positioned on the opposite side, face, or surface of the card 100a with respect to any particular pixel stack 378. [ The configuration of the pixel stacks 378 on opposite sides of the substrate 378, using "a" and "b" for the various pixel elements of FIG.

The light-emitting pixel element 107a

The light detecting pixel element 148b

The piezoelectric-output pixel element 113a

The piezoelectric-input pixel element (111a)

The magnetic-input pixel element 150a,

Magnetic-output pixel element 109a,

Substrate-substrate-substrate 370

The magnetic-output pixel element 109b

The magnetic-output pixel element 109b

The piezoelectric-input pixel element (111b)

The piezoelectric-output pixel element (113b)

The photodetection pixel element 148a,

The light-emitting pixel element 107b

The optical transmission or pinhole passages 387a may then pass through the substrate 370 through each pixel element of the first pixel stack 378 and then onto the opposite side of the substrate 370 Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 378 < / RTI > Thus, the optical transmission or pinhole passages 387a and 387b provide improved collimation of light because they extend across or through more pixel elements or pixel layers compared to the embodiment of Figure 7b And reduces blur and fog because the optical transmission paths 387a and 387b are much longer than the optical transmission paths 87a and 87b. As described herein, each pixel element of the pixel stack 378 is selectively and independently controllable to have at least an on or active state or mode, and an off or inactive state or mode, ≪ / RTI >

[0129] It will be appreciated that the order of the layers in each of the stacks S1, S2, S1 ', and S2' may be different from that shown in Figures 7A-8B. In addition, embodiments in accordance with the present disclosure may include more or fewer layers than shown on each side of the substrates 170, 370, but each of the substrates 170, And includes at least a light receiving / detecting layer and a light emitting layer on the side. Also, the light emitting and light receiving / detecting units may be positioned on the same layer or level in each stack S1, S2, S1 ', and S2', but in such an embodiment, the noise / interference It is desirable to multiplex the light emission and detection functions. In one exemplary embodiment, the light emitting pixel elements 107 are operated for a first time period. During the first time interval, the photodetection pixel elements 148 are turned off to prevent noise and interference from being emitted by the light emitting pixel elements 107. When the light emitting pixel elements 107 are turned off, the light detecting pixel elements 148 can be operated to collect light without interfering with the light emitting pixel elements 107. Such multiplexing, timing, or clocking of the light emitting pixel elements 107 and the light detecting pixel elements 148 reduces or prevents blooming or saturation of the light detecting pixel elements 148. More generally, the card 100 is designed to avoid crosstalk or interference between various pixel elements by multiplexing, clocking, or timing as well as the physical positions described herein. For example, the magnetic-output pixels 109 are timed to operate to avoid interference with the magnetic-input pixels 150.

[0130] In some embodiments, the piezoelectric-input and piezoelectric-output layers allow the piezoelectric elements to receive and transmit motion, sound, and / or vibrations to make it easier for the user to detect movement, sound, and vibrations, The piezoelectric-input and piezoelectric-output layers are positioned "higher" in the pixel stack, i.e., farther from the substrate and closer to the outer surface of the pixel stack, as it makes it easier for the elements to receive motion, sound, To benefit from being. As the piezoelectric pixel elements are more deeply positioned in the pixel stack, the signals traveling to and from the piezoelectric pixel elements are more attenuated as the signals pass through the intervening layers or pixel elements. The pinhole passages can alleviate some of the signal attenuation by providing a more direct path from the exterior of the intermixed array to the piezoelectric elements deeper in the pixel stack than other pixel elements.

[0131] The magnetic-input and magnetic-output pixel elements are minimally affected by intervening pixel layers or pixel elements. Because such pixel elements have little or no effect on other pixel elements in the pixel stack, the magnetic-related pixel elements can be further deeply positioned in the pixel stack, i.e., the magnetic-input and magnetic- The elements may be positioned closer to the substrate than other pixel elements if beneficial to the overall design of the pixel stack.

[0132] In yet another exemplary embodiment, each photodetection pixel element 148 and each photodetection pixel element 107, depending on the polarity of the voltage and voltage applied to the semiconductor junction, not only collects light, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > semiconductor < / RTI > junction. Thus, in one exemplary embodiment, both the light-emitting layer and the light-detecting layer may be in the same layer. Of course, the ability to provide light in a first, i.e., light emitting mode, for detection in a second, i.e., light receiving mode, when the same semiconductor junction is operated in two different modes, And is more difficult than when it is operated.

[0133] The multiplexing, clocking, or timing of the operation of various individual pixels of the card 100 may be performed in a manner that allows mixed mode operation of the pixels. For example, in data communication, the card 100 may initially receive the light-emitting pixel elements 107, followed by the magnetic-output pixels 109, through the module and / or processor, such as the processor 110, The light-emitting pixel elements 107 can then be operated, followed by the piezoelectric-output pixels 113. Of course, any combination of actions is possible, and if the receiving device "knows" that a particular data sequence is associated with a particular user via a password, biometric authentication input, voice recognition, etc., ) To the receiver is improved.

[0134] In addition, FIGS. 7A-8B illustrate exemplary diagrams that merely illustrate the ordering of elements. For example, when laying out and designing with very, very large scale integration (VVLSI) It is not necessary to necessarily be sized or shaped in such a way as to be able to substitute according to the characteristics and other explanations, and is not intended to be so limited. In addition, the use of the thickness of the card 100 for the development of the depth for the light collection elements allows the pinhole lens effects to limit light to the light approaching the card 100 at near perfect perpendicularity, It should be noted that the light is limited to light directly in front of the hole and to light that is reflected from the object to the hole (possibly providing self-illumination of the object sourced to the LED output of the card 100).

[0135] Figures 9A-9E illustrate pixel stack arrangements or configurations in accordance with exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure.

[0136] 9A illustrates a perspective view of a pixel stack 780 that includes an output or transmit pixel element 782 and an input or receive pixel element 784 positioned on a substrate 788. The gain for the pixel stack configuration may be such that the output pixel element 782 is configured in an overlapping configuration away from the substrate 788 or perpendicular to the substrate 788 to provide emission and detection functions in a compact arrangement or configuration Ability. The pixel stack 780 may be covered by a film or cover layer 786 and the film or cover layer 786 may comprise a plurality of pinhole openings 790 and each of the pinhole openings 790 The pinhole passage 792 is opened. In the embodiment of the pixel stack 780 shown in FIG. 9A, each pinhole passage 792 is formed in the film or cover layer 786 and partially in the output or transmission pixel element 782 and extends in the z direction do. In other embodiments, pinhole openings 790 and associated pinhole passages 792, shown as being formed at the corners of the pixel stack 780, can be positioned off the periphery rotor of the pixel stack 780, May be positioned at or near the center of the pixel stack 780 when viewed in plan view. In another embodiment, a single pinhole opening and passageway may be positioned at or near the center of the pixel stack, e.g., as shown in Figure 9D. An advantage to this configuration is the ability to collimate the light received through each pinhole passageway 792, which improves the ability to generate images from the light received by the plurality of pinhole passages 792.

[0137] Additional pixel elements may be added to the pixel stack 780 of FIG. 9A. For example, FIG. 9B illustrates a perspective view of the pixel stack 98 of FIGS. 7A and 7B. As described herein, the pixel stack 98 includes a plurality of pixel elements that are formed or positioned on a substrate 170. The pixel elements may include a photodetection pixel element 148 positioned adjacent to the substrate 170. The light emitting pixel element 107 is positioned at a distance apart from the light detecting pixel element 148. [ Between the light-detecting pixel element 148 and the light-emitting pixel element 107, a plurality of pixel elements are positioned. 7B, the plurality of pixel elements includes a magnetic-output pixel element 109, a magnetic-input pixel element 150, a piezo-input pixel element 111, and a piezo-output pixel element 113. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. . In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 7B, the plurality of pixel elements are positioned to produce a stack extending outwardly from the substrate 170 in the z-direction in the described order. All pixel elements in the pixel stack 98 are in an overlapping arrangement in the z direction. A pinhole opening 188a is formed in the light emitting pixel element 197 at the corner of the light emitting pixel element 107 and the pinhole passage 187a is formed by a magnetic-output pixel element 109, a magnetic-input pixel element 150, A piezoelectric-input pixel element 111, and a piezoelectric-output pixel element 113, and extends in the z-direction. The pinhole passageway 188a provides a passageway for light to reach the photodetection pixel element 148 without crossing external pixel elements of the pixel stack 98. In an exemplary embodiment, a light-blocking layer (not shown) is positioned between the outer surface of the light-emitting pixel element 107 and the upper surface of the light-detecting pixel element 148 to provide light To the light traveling through the pinhole aperture 188a and pinhole passage 187a, which improves the collimation of the light and provides an improvement in the image produced from the plurality of light detecting pixel elements 148. [ In an alternative embodiment, the intervening pixel layer may be configured to block light instead of having separate layer blocking light. In an exemplary embodiment, pinhole passage 187a may be coated with a material that reduces reflections to reduce off-axis rays reaching photodetection pixel element 148. [

[0138] FIG. 9C illustrates a perspective view of the pixel stack 378 of FIGS. 8A and 8B. As described herein, the pixel stack 378 includes a plurality of pixel elements formed or positioned on a substrate 370 in an overlapping arrangement or configuration extending in the z direction. The pixel elements are positioned between the light emitting pixel element 107 and the substrate 370 at a distance from the substrate 370 and at a distance from the substrate 370, And a detection pixel element 148. Each pixel stack further includes a plurality of pixel elements 380 positioned between the light detecting pixel element 148 and the substrate 370. 9C, the same pixel stacks 378 are positioned on opposite sides of the substrate 370 such that the pinhole passageway 387a positioned at the corners of the pixel stack 378 is aligned with the substrate 370 through the substrate 370, Through all of the pixel elements of the upper or upper side pixel stack 378 of the substrate 370 and through the pixel elements 380 of the lower or side side pixel stack 378 of the substrate 370, And is terminated at the light detecting pixel element 148. Similarly, the pinhole passageway 387b positioned at the opposite corner of the pixel stack 378 from the pinhole passageway 387a is coupled to the pixel 378 via the substrate 370, all of the pixel stack 378 on the bottom or bottom side of the substrate 370 Extends through the pixel elements and extends through the pixel element 380 of the pixel stack 378 on the top or top side of the substrate 370 and terminates at the photodetection pixel element 148. [ The plurality of pixel elements 380 may comprise the pixel elements described in FIG. 8B, or may include other pixel elements, if the operation of the various pixel elements does not interfere with each other. The advantages for the pixel stack 378 are that the length of the pinhole passageway 388a and the pinhole passageway 38b are relatively long when compared to other pinhole passageways described herein, which provides image quality through the plurality of pinholes 388a Improve.

[0139] FIG. 9D illustrates a pixel stack or column according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, generally designated 800, which is different from the pixel stack and pixel layer configurations of FIGS. 7A, 7B, 8A, and 8B. A plurality of pixel stacks 800 may be formed and arrayed on a substrate 804 and arranged on a first side and a second opposite side of the substrate 804 and include a plurality of pixel element layers 802 . Beginning with the pixel closest to the substrate 804, the layers 802 may include a monochrome light source or emitter pixel element 806, a light detecting pixel element 808, a main light emitting pixel 803, which may include red, Element 810, a magnetic-output pixel element 812, a magnetic-input pixel element 814, a piezoelectric-input pixel element 816, a piezoelectric-output pixel element 818, and a flexible polymer layer (not shown) 820). The polymer layer 820 may be transparent in an exemplary embodiment or may be transparent and / or transparent in other exemplary embodiments, depending on whether light needs to be received through the polymer layer 820, Or absorbed. The polymer layer 820 includes a vertical-extending pinhole passage 822, that is, the pinhole passage 822 extends perpendicularly or orthogonally to the substrate 804, which extends on the outer surface of the polymer layer 820, Lt; / RTI > The pinhole opening 824 and the pinhole passage 822 may be positioned away from the edge of the pixel stack 800 and centered in the pixel stack 800. The layer of resist material 826 may allow transmission of light from the monochrome pixel element 806 and / or the main light emitting pixel element 808, illustrated by arrows 830, And is positioned between the polymer layer 820 and the piezoelectric-output layer 818 to block light transmission except through an opening or gap 828 in the resist material 826 for receiving the light. The received light is transmitted through the transparent pixel elements 818, 816, 814, 812 and 810 to be received by the light detecting pixel element 808. Or spacing 828 is positioned to align with pinhole passage 822 and / or pinhole opening 824 and is sized to match pinhole passage 822 and / or pinhole opening 824 in the exemplary embodiment . In an alternative embodiment, the pinhole passageway 822 may extend through at least the pixel elements 818, 816, 814 and 812 to open in the light emitting layer 810. In an exemplary embodiment, the sound produced by the piezoelectric-output pixel element 818 can be transmitted through the pinhole passage 822. However, it may leave additional pinholes (not shown) arranged to provide additional positions for the sound to leave the card 100 to increase the magnitude of the sound energy emitted by the card 100. 9D provides the ability to generate monochrome light or multi-frequency, e.g., color, from the pixel stack 800. [ In an exemplary embodiment, the main light emitting pixel element 810 can be eliminated, and the pixel stack 800 can emit only monochrome light. The light emitted by monochrome light source 806 is very coherent, which is an attribute of lasers, which can be used to gain gain in certain applications. Thus, the pixel stack 800 that can form pixel stacks or columns on the card 100 provides advantages over the pixel layers and configurations described previously. Although not shown in FIG. 9D, the substrate 804 directs light emitted by the light emitting pixels 806 in a downward direction toward the substrate 804 to be reflected upwardly away from the substrate 804 And may be reflective. Alternatively, the reflective layer may be positioned between the substrate 804 and the light-emitting pixel element 806.

[0140] 9E illustrates a plurality of pixel stacks 870 including a plurality of overlapping pixel elements extending in the z direction. Each pixel stack is offset, staggered, or skewed in at least one of the x- and y-directions from at least one transmitting or receiving pixel element and at least one transmitting pixel element. At least one received pixel element or a transmitted pixel element. Such orientation of the pixel elements may be described as a staggered overlap, or may stagger overlapping. For example, in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 9E, the monochrome light emitting pixel element 806 is offset from the light emitting pixel element 810 in the x and y directions. 9E, the light-emitting pixel element 806 and the light-detecting pixel element 808 may include a magnetic-output element 812, a magnetic-input pixel element 814, a piezo-input pixel element 814, 816), the piezoelectric-output pixel element 818, and the light-emitting pixel element 810 in the x and y directions. 9E is that the position of pinhole passages 822 is minimized in the corners of pixel elements 810, 818, 816, 814, and 812, and interference with these pixel elements. Each pinhole passage 822 is open at the light detecting pixel element 808 and provides a path for light transmission and reception for the light emitting pixel element 806 and the light detecting pixel element 808, An improved collimation of the light detected by the pixel element 808 is provided and provides collimated light from the light emitting pixel element 806. Although not shown in FIG. 9E, the substrate 804 may be reflective to direct the light emitted by the light emitting pixels 806 in a downward direction toward the substrate 804 to be reflected upwardly away from the substrate 804 Or the reflective layer may be positioned between the substrate 804 and the light-emitting pixel element 806.

[0141] The above description of the layout of the components of the card 100 will not be taken as a limitation. The idea is that when light is absorbed, the light collecting pixels receive light that is substantially perpendicular to the surface and that limiting light that can enter the memory results in an array that can form a reliable image as close as possible to the card 100 (Which is close to the major surfaces and is just covered with a transparent film or other transparent surfaces that allow light to escape and be received), ensuring to collect the optical data collected from the outer portion of the card 100 Such as light collection components, pinholes or tunnel structures, that require a field of view. Magnetic-Input and Magnetic-Output Magnetic and piezoelectric elements for functional and auditory functionality are strategically placed for maximum effectiveness. Sound Generation and Sound Reception Piezoelectric elements may require eye-gaze access to the surface. The magnetic elements can be buried by components and nonmagnetic layers without requiring a line of sight access to the surface.

[0142] For embodiments including pinhole passages for accessing pixel layers or pixel elements deeper than other pixel layers and elements, such as in Figures 7B, 8B, and 9E, Element, and a portion of the light detecting pixel element is shown, for example, in Figures 9A-9C. In the embodiment of Figure 9E, the pinhole passage 822 extends through the plurality of pixel elements and terminates at the photodetection pixel element 808. The pinhole passage 822 is extended and the pixel elements adjacent to the pinhole passage 822 in the embodiment of Figure 9E such as the light emitting pixel element 810, the piezoelectric-output pixel element 818, the piezo-input pixel element 816, the magnetic-input pixel element 814, and the magnetic-output pixel element 812 are patterned and arranged with respect to the pinhole passageway 822 to provide optimal operation of each of the pixel elements. Additionally, controllable active regions, control electrode patterns, or geometry that define activated or activated regions of the pixel elements described herein may be staggered, offset, skewed, i.e., controllable active regions I.e., in the x and y directions with respect to the pinhole passageways described herein to provide the geometry. Regardless of the positions of the various portions of the pixel element, any layer including a portion of the pinhole passage can be controlled by controllable active regions or control electrode patterns, which are geometrically arranged with respect to the position of the pinhole passage, .

[0143] Other components that emit or collect energy, such as the sun or quantum dots or wells, can be added so that the surface design becomes more dynamic over time. The quantum dots function as solar cells by emitting coherent light and collecting light. Some types of energy have to be gazed for reliable reception, and other energy can be buried in a substructure. Burying all the electronic devices in the current layer into the layers can be accomplished by any suitable means, such as power distribution, data distribution, signal lines, grounding, battery, processing, memory, adapters such as network adapters, (but not limited to) all electronic devices that can be embedded in a form factor. For form factors other than credit cards, the possibilities for meeting the power and size constraints of the form factor are expanded, assuming that the form factors are of arbitrary dimension, especially of greater thickness. Particularly for any form factor of smaller thickness, some considerations change; The concepts of the present disclosure remain. The pixels described hereinabove are likely to evolve over time and such evolution may provide an additional reduction in the size of the pixels to minimize stack dimensions which may potentially result in higher density pixels, It is expected to provide a larger space for pixels, e.g., quantum wells or quantum dots, or solar wells or dots.

[0144] Electrically, each layer of card 100 may be insulated from adjacent layers by the addition of an optically transparent insulating layer (not shown), or adjacent layers of card 100 may share electrical connections. For example, two adjacent layers may share a single ground plane and / or two adjacent layers may share a voltage source. These configurations reduce the cost of creating the card 100. Other electrical connection configurations may also be provided to supply voltage and provide ground for each of the pixels of card 100. [ For example, electrical connections may extend in a direction perpendicular to the substrate 170.

[0145] The sensitivity of the pixels described in this disclosure may also vary based on cost, power availability, size, and the like. Pixels with high sensitivity, such as the magnetic-input pixels 150, enable higher imaging resolution, and higher sensitivity can improve other capabilities such as accuracy to track calculations. While higher resolution is once associated with higher power, new technologies, such as LEDs, enable higher resolution displays while using lower power than many competing technologies. The card 100 is configured to be able to adapt to newer technologies that require less energy to operate, as well as to utilize currently available technologies, as well as improved efficiency, lower cost.

[0146] Embodiments of the card 100 in accordance with the present disclosure may be used to stack cards 100 such that one card is placed directly on top of another card (e.g., during the swap mode function of the cards 100) Or swapping data through stacking cards in a holder. The ability to laminate the cards 100 with no clearance between the cards 100 or with a clearance of zero directly lies on top of the other cards, the ability to stack the stacked or columnar The transmit and receive pixels can be sufficiently aligned for reliable data transmission between various receive or output pixels and various receive pixels. Because of this capability, any data that the "master" card 100 (ie, the card that transmits data) wants to share can be distributed to the stacked "slave" receiving cards 100. Accordingly, the plurality of cards 100 may be loaded with data, such as commands, plans, social networking content, entertainment items, or essentially any data that the mastercard 100 desires to share in a given transaction Can receive. Application deployment to share data in these modes would be very likely to make the data movement process safer and less time consuming. The card 100 may transfer data from its surfaces more quickly than through its network connections because each emission pixel, such as a light emitting pixel element 107, Element 148 to provide a plurality of data transmission and reception paths. For example, card-to-card data transfer arrangements can deliver at a rate of 1,000 GBPS or 10-100 times faster than this, but networks can not currently deliver at such a tremendous rate.

[0147] The dual-side function of the card 100 allows the cards to be stacked in any manner, since the cards 100 can be used to determine which of the major faces 101 or 102 of the stacked cards 100 face each other Recognize, communicate, establish handshaking, and initiate communication between the cards. The dual-side function of the card 100 may include a mode for performing data transfer between a plurality of stacked cards 100. For example, one or more cards 100 of the card stack may translate the data, thereby ensuring that compatible data is received by all the cards 100 in stack data delivery. have. In the method of reliably encrypting and decrypting data, the cards 100 can each share a portion of the data, and only when the exact cards 100 are stacked (even limited to the exact time instant) The cards 100 will represent their decrypted data intended to combine their data content and produce a functional data set for delivery. By using the data stored in the servers and by transferring the pointers to the data, the amount of data that can be reliably moved by the card 100 using this method is unlimited and any other data known to the applicant The security becomes exponentially better than the delivery method.

[0148] In the float embodiment, the card 100 may include magnetic elements that float and position the first card stacked on the second card. These cards operate independently of the physical dock. For example, passive stationary magnets may be mounted on the core region of card 100, for example, on board 170 or 370 as described above, with the ability of a card reader to stably lift two cards 100 and read stripe data Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > and / or < / RTI > At least one pixel of the light-emitting unit of one of the first or second light-emitting units 122, 124 on the first card 100 is in contact with the first and second light- Is aligned with the facing pixels of one of the second optical detection units 126 and 128 and is aligned with the facing pixels of one of the first and second optical detection units 126 and 128 on the first card 100 At least one pixel of the light detection unit is aligned with the facing pixels of one of the first and second light emission units 122, 124 on the second card 100. In an exemplary embodiment, alignment of the above-described facing light receiving / detecting pixels 148 and light emitting pixels 107 may be performed in a predetermined and secure manner.

[0149] In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may include a plurality of currently controlled electromagnets (not shown), and the levitation / positioning controller unit or Mag Lev unit 147 may be configured such that one card is placed on top of another And may be configured to set the current for each of the electromagnets to allow lifting of similarly similarly equipped cards in a floating manner. The Mag Lev unit 147 may be controlled by a processor dedicated to the Mag Lev unit (not shown), or by a processor integrated with the Mag Lev unit 147. [ Figures 10A-10B illustrate an example of a card 100c that includes a float function, and the card 100c may alternatively have any of the card structures disclosed herein. 10A, the card 100c includes a plurality of individual electromagnets 910-926 embedded in a central region or core of the card 100c, for example, embedded in the substrate 170 or 370 described above ). Each electromagnet 910-926 includes a coil whose current can be controlled, for example, by a Mag Lev unit 147 to emit a magnetic field strength corresponding to the controlled current value. Some or all of the electromagnets 910-926 may be reversible-pole electromagnets such that the polarity of the electromagnets is changed depending on whether a positive or negative current is applied to the coils of the electromagnets.

[0150] Each electromagnet 910-926 is electrically coupled to a lifting control circuit (not shown), which may be part of the data exchange unit 146 shown in FIG. 2 and integrated into the card processor 110 have. Fig. 10B shows a card 100c and another similarly equipped card 100d which is magnetically levitated in the vertical direction above the illustrated z-axis or card 100c. At least one of the electromagnets 910-926 of the card 100d, e.g., the electromagnets 916 and 920 of the card 100d, attracts the electromagnets 916 and 920 of the card 100c, And the feedback loop may be utilized by a levitation control circuit (e.g., a PID controller) to continuously adjust one or more electromagnets to maintain a relative position between the cards 100c and 100d .

[0151] Although not shown, each of the cards 100c and 100d includes a card 100d which can move the card 100d and accurately hold the card 100d in any of the three shown dimensions, for example, an x-axis, axis, y-axis, and / or z-axis with high accuracy by translating card 100d in the y- and / or z-axis directions and / or using electromagnetic variability And may include electromagnets provided at predetermined angles to provide precise control of the magnetic fields that can be rotated about the center. In an exemplary embodiment, card 100c may indicate a master state, and an overlying card 100d may indicate a slave state, so that master card 100c controls the positioning of card 100d. The distances between the various points of the cards 100c and 100d are set so that the specific light from specific parts of the main surface of the card 100c (or card 100d) facing the opposite card 100d (or 100c) One or both of the first or second light emitting units 122 and 124 of the card 100c (or card 100d) at different localized positions on the face of the card 100 through the emission of wavelengths and patterns And one or more of the pixels of the first or second photodetector units 126 and 128. [ The distance between cards 100c and 100d may be, for example, releasing a known visual or magnetic image of a known size on one card, allowing the other card to see an image of known size, By using the parallax to determine the distance of the target pixel.

[0152] Fig. 10C shows the card 100d in the y-axis direction through the electromagnets 914, 920, and 926 to move the negative x-axis side of the card 100d through an angle? In the negative z- ) Is pivoting about an axis, the lifting control circuit floats the card 100d by the card 100c. In an embodiment, the cards 100c and 100d may include one or more optical emitters and complementary light receiving / detecting elements (not shown) When aligned, is arranged to produce a detected signal, e.g., exceeding a predetermined power / duration threshold level, only if at least aligned in a predetermined manner for an initial handshake. 10B and 10C illustrate a dotted line 928 representing the direction in which the light receiving pixels of the card 100c can receive and detect light and a direction in which the light emitting pixels of the card 100d can emit light And a solid line 930 expressing it. 10b, the light receiving pixels of the card 100c do not receive and detect the photostream emitted from the light emitting pixels of the card 100d, but Fig. Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 928 < / RTI > Although Figures 10b and 10c illustrate a pair of light emitting and receiving pixels, a plurality of light receiving and light emitting pixel pairs may be arranged in various relative positions with respect to each other, other than perpendicular to the surfaces of the cards, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 100c < / RTI > and 100d. In an embodiment, the communication between the cards 100c and 100d may include a form of encryption where the relative position of the cards 100c and 100d may be periodically changed in any of the ways described above, Emitting pixels < / RTI > 107 and the different subsets of light-receiving / detecting pixels 148 are correspondingly switched. In this way, the cards 100c and 100d can communicate with each other in an extremely secure manner.

[0153] Cards 100d and 100c as shown in Figures 10a-10c, one card belonging to the buyer and the other card belonging to the seller, the buyer displaying the credit card image, the seller displaying the barcode, It will be appreciated that both parties are required to provide a biometric identification (ID) and that both parties may also be involved in situations where they also use the same platform for general browsing, shopping, and the like. Since the card 100 provides double-sided communication capability, the cards 100 may also provide a conduit through an intermediary, such as a lawyer or a title company. Thus, the buyer's card 100 may include coded information that provides a "cashier's check" from the buyer's bank. The intermediary automatically receives the "cashier's check" data and automatically delivers the coded information to the seller's card 100, which represents the net proceeds of the sale. These intermediary transactions may also include auction conditions, contingent sales, and other situations where three or more parties participate in a transaction.

[0154] The ability to place a plurality of cards 100 side-by-side on the stack results in another feature of the card 100, which is to provide dynamic ad-hoc memory. 2 and 6), each individual card 100 generally includes at least a portion of its available memory 114 (e.g., . By enabling a memory sharing mode with a single card or master card that places and controls a plurality of cards 100 side by side, the available memory of each card 100 in the stack of cards 100 is It may help functions that require more memory than is available for one card 100. While this memory will typically be temporary, using the high-speed communication capabilities of the card 100, the stacks of the cards 100 provide low-cost scalable memory in a plurality of environments including environmentally unfavorable environments can do. Since such adhook memory is flexible, scalable, and shared across a plurality of actual locations, the adhook memory of the plurality of cards 100 forms the adhook cloud memory.

[0155] FIG. 11A is a view of a bracket, or mechanical dock 1002, that may be utilized to provide a measured spacing, gap, or distance between a plurality of cards 100e and 100f constructed in accordance with the present disclosure. Dock 1002 includes a plurality of slots 1010 and 1012 that are separated by land 1014 and configured to hold cards 100e and 100f at a predetermined separation distance d from each other. The predetermined spacing d is established by the ability of the cards 100e and 100f to transmit and receive information between the layers and pixels described above. In an exemplary embodiment, the spacing distance d may range from 1 mm to 2 mm. Figure 10B shows an embodiment of the vertical dock 1020, although the dock 1002 is configured for horizontally oriented cards. The vertical dock 120 includes a plurality of slots 1022 and 1024 separated by a land 1026 and configured to hold the cards 100e and 100d at a distance d from one another. In another exemplary embodiment (not shown), the dock is configured so that the cards 100e and 100f are positioned at a minimum distance between adjacent surfaces of the cards 100e and 100f, Without having any distance between the surfaces, i.e., the adjacent surfaces of the cards 100e and 100f are in contact with each other.

[0156] Physical docks, such as docks 1002 and 1020, may be used for any card-to-card data transfer, particularly for long-term data transfers between cards. The transmissions may also be achieved by holding the two cards together, with the cards aligned substantially to overlap each other. While having two cards that completely overlap provides the most optimal alignment of the transmitted and received pixels, the module and / or processor 110 of each card 100 determines which pixels receive the data All available pixels can be analyzed, and any pixels that are misaligned and / or otherwise not receiving data can be ignored. The magnetic levitation techniques described above can also be used for short-term or long-term data transfer. The magnetic levitation techniques can improve the security of data transfer by keeping the two cards extremely close together, such as within 1 mm of each other or in contact with each other, RTI ID = 0.0 > transmissions < / RTI >

[0157] Docks 1002 and 1020 may also be spring loaded or flexible detents (not shown) that engage fill electrodes of cards 100e and 100f, such as fill electrodes 184 shown in FIG. 6 (Not shown). In addition, although the height of the docks 1002 and 1020 can be set to cover the cards 100e and 100f, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B can, in one example, (101 and 102) of the cards 100e and 100f to display an image during transmission, when the transfer is complete, or when a problem is encountered, to alert the user or to provide other information to the user And to allow for the use of exposed portions of the cards 100e and 100f for user input and control. It will be appreciated that the number of slots may be any practical number that allows communication between more than two cards. In addition, only one slot may be provided for the charging and / or communication dock, which may be connected to other devices via serial communication and charging lines, such as a USB cable.

[0158] Two or more cards 100 may be placed in a holder (not shown) where the cards are very precisely aligned inside, and the holder may hold cards between the cards without any significant air space, And can provide external magnetic or physical forces within the tolerance to avoid damage to the cards. For this purpose, the pins and guides do not have any effect on the expected functions of the card 100, but the card 100e, which aligns one card 100 with another card 100, (E.g., a display on a PC with a portion that is shaped like a card 100) that is fashioned to be aligned with the card 100f, or that allows one card to be fully integrated into the device through the same or compatible technology May be provided as some notches or grooves on the surface features or edges that are fully integrated and all functions that use the processor, software, and network attachments of the PC may be enabled).

[0159] Figures 12a-12c illustrate a method for performing transactions in an ordinary retail and wholesale environment as well as among individuals, for example, in professional offices, conferences, flea markets, festivals, fairs, second- Diagrams of exemplary swipe brackets that may be used as portable POS card readers. These brackets can be used as docking, lock, and swivel brackets and can be adjusted for two different docking orientations, e.g., horizontal or vertical.

[0160] 12A is a side view of a portable swipe bracket 1102a according to an exemplary embodiment in which a card user inserts a card 100g and then moves the card 100g to a virtual or physical magnetic stripe The other card 100h can be swiped horizontally or vertically so that the card 100h can be read. At least card 100g is an embodiment of a card according to the present disclosure, and card 100h may be a "legacy" type card comprising physical magnetic stripes or a card according to the present disclosure. The swipe bracket 1102a includes a first slot 1104 and a second slot 1106 (with a section 1116 therebetween), each of which accommodates cards 100g and 100h. The section 1116 is detected by a magnetic-input layer of the card 100g, such as the magnetic-input layers 192a and 192b previously described herein, and a magnetic stripe, for example a magnetic stripe 104 described hereinabove, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > a < / RTI > Although not shown, the card 100g may be securely provided to the first slot 1104 by frictional engagement or enclosed in a slightly deformed first slot 1104 that is part of an enclosure (not shown) Lt; / RTI > can simply be held in place during completion. In an embodiment, the first slot 1104 and / or the second slot 1106 extend to overlap the card 100g and / or the card 100h in a farther or lesser extent than that shown in FIG. . In an exemplary embodiment, the swipe bracket 1102a may be attached to or hand-held to another object, e.g., by an adhesive or a clamping structure.

[0161] 12B is a cross-sectional view of an exemplary embodiment of a swipe bracket 1102b that may be used as a table-top or counter-type swiping device. The swipe bracket 1102b may be integrally formed as part of an upper bracket portion 1120 and as part of an upper bracket portion 1120 that is attached to or provides support and stability to the upper bracket portion 1120. [ As shown in FIG. The base 1103 further includes a base upper surface 1111. It is noted that "top surface" is so marked for convenience, and surface 1111 may be oriented in a plurality of orientations that may not necessarily be described as "top ". The swipe bracket 1102b includes a first slot 1108 that is positioned or formed in the upper bracket portion 1120 that defines the portion of the enclosure that houses the card 100g, A second slot 1110 that is positioned or formed in the upper bracket portion 1120, and a section 1118 that is positioned between the slots 1108 and 1110. In another embodiment, base 1103 is not provided and bracket portion 1120 may be disposed on a surface or hand-held. The upper bracket portion 1120 may be oriented in any orientation, for example, the orientation and other orientations in which the slots 1108 and 1110 extend in a direction parallel to the base upper surface 1111. [

[0162] A slot opening (not shown) is positioned at one end of the swipe bracket 1102c to allow the card 100g to be inserted into the swipe bracket 1102c. FIG. 12C shows a cross-sectional view of a swipe bracket 1102c, which is a modification of the embodiment shown in FIG. 12B, which allows increased operating features when swapping cards or legacy cards according to the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 12C, the swipe bracket 1102c includes an upper bracket portion 1122 and may include a base, e.g., a base 1103. The upper bracket portion 1122 is formed in a section 1130 and a section 1130 positioned between the first slot 1124, the second slot 1126, the first slot 1124 and the second slot 1126 And positioned between the first slot 1124 and the second slot 1126 to allow the card 100g to be selectively swung through the slot 1126 with a first opening or window 1112 . The upper bracket portion 1122 is positioned between the outer surface 1128 of the bracket 1102c and the slot 1124 to provide a second opening or window 1114 that allows user input and / . Although not shown, at least one aperture / window 1112,1114 includes side portions that support a portion of the bracket 1102c that forms the upper portion 1124a of the slot 1124. [ With the first opening or window 1112, the swipe bracket 1102c can also serve as a data transmission bracket for data transmission between the cards 100g and 100h.

An embodiment of a portable swipe bracket in accordance with the present disclosure may be used to operate the card 100g and / or the card 100h, fill the card 100g, and / or move the card 100h while in the swipe bracket It will be appreciated that a power supply may be included that allows for extended use of the battery 100g. In an embodiment, the brackets may be communicatively coupled or docked to another device, such as a cell phone, laptop computer, via a serial bus or a Bluetooth ^TM , electronic tablet, or Wi-Fi access node. In addition, any embodiment of the swipe bracket may be configured to allow user input to the first major surface 101 or the second major surface 102 of the card 100g and / or the card 100h and / One or more apertures or windows of optically transparent material that allows optical communication between the cards. In addition, embodiments of the swipe bracket may include one or both of the card users, including operating elements (not shown), such as bracket portions or hard keys on the base, to move the card 100g, card 100h, 1) < / RTI > (see FIG. 1).

[0164] 13 is a diagram of a conventional, or legacy, magnetic swipe POS reader 1200 that may be described as a card reader or credit / cash card processor 1200. FIG. The reader 1200 includes a conventional magnetic read head 1212, a slot 1202 for guiding the card proximate the magnetic read head 1212, a display 1204 such as an LCD touch panel display, and a set of Operating hard keys 1206, but some readers do not include working hard keys. The reader 1200 also includes a power supply line 1208 that provides power to the reader 1200, a data supply line 1210 that allows the reader 1200 to communicate with a remote verification server (not shown), and a housing 1214 ). The power supply line 1208 is connected to the power connector 1209 which is positioned on the rear side of the housing 1214 of the reader 1200 and the data supply line 1210 is connected to the data connector 1211 from the rear side of the housing of the reader 1200 .

[0165] 14 illustrates an exemplary POS card reader 1300 in accordance with the present disclosure. Unlike the legacy card reader 1200, the card reader 1300 does not include a slot for swiping the card, but instead reads and writes in a flatbed manner. 14, the reader 1300 includes a reader body 1301, a secondary display 1302, and operational hard keys 1303, although other embodiments include one or both of the secondary display and the working hard keys . ≪ / RTI > Card reader 1300 further includes a frame 1306 surrounding communication display 1304 and communication display 1304. The card reader 1300 includes a power supply line 1308 and a power connector 1309 to provide a connection between the power supply line 1308 and the reader body 1301. The card reader 1300 also includes a data supply line 1310 and a data connector 1311 to provide a connection between the data supply line 1310 and the reader body 1301.

[0166] The frame 1306 around the communication display 1304 may be configured, i.e. shaped and positioned, to position the card 100 parallel to and proximate to the communication display 1304. For example, the frame 1306 may include only a first side 1306a and an adjacent second side 1306b that are raised, higher, or apart above the outer or outer surface of the communication display 1304, The first side 1306a and the second side 1306b are configured to assist the user in placing the card 100 on the communication display 1304 and to guide the user in a direction away from the first side 1306a and the second side 1306b. And an inner corner 1314 that allows the card 100 to slide. In another embodiment, the entire frame 1306 is raised above the outer or outer surface of the communication display 1304 and ejectors (not shown) having a plastic (soft) bottom on the left and right, for example, Cock or tilt up to allow the user to grab the edge 100 to retrieve the card 100 from the reader body 1301 or retrieve the card 100 without difficulty. In an embodiment, the magnetic levitation function of the card 100 may also be provided in a more recent version of a terminal-based point-of-sale management system that allows the point-of-sale management system to lift the card 100, This removes the touch or contact for moving the card 100 away from the communication display 1304. [ The ability to move the card 100 away from the communication display 1304 to enable easy removal of the card 100 from the reader body 1301 reduces the contact with the reader body 1301 thereby preventing the spread of communicable disease And can help protect the card 100 from wear and tear.

[0167] Communication display 1304 may include elements of card 100 of the present disclosure and may include at least optical emitters and optical receivers / detectors such as first / second light emitting units 122, 124 and / First and second light detection units 126 and 128, and at least the regions 1312a and 1312b, as described above in connection with the magnetic strip reader. In this manner, the reader 1300 can read the magnetic stripes of both the cards 100 and legacy cards configured in accordance with the present disclosure, in optical communication with the card 100 in accordance with the present disclosure .

[0168] Legacy readers may be replaced with readers according to the present disclosure, e.g., the reader 1300 described hereinabove, but it may be necessary to communicate over a legacy type card reader (i.e., a swipe box) This is because the conventional sweeper box will not be executed if it is not confirmed. In this situation, a conventional swipe box may be used to provide a legacy magnetic swipe POS assembly, including flatbed reading and writing, without removing the legacy wipers, to the card features disclosed herein, particularly the optical features, Can be emulated using a fast and expeditious configuration that is transformed into a form that is more suitable to favor the use of light emitting pixels 148 and light emitting pixels 107. As shown in Figures 15-15c, a vendor may use a simple attachment mechanism for rigid docking with a legacy reader, e.g., using a cover designed using industrial double-sided tape and rubberized gaskets, An optical display / reader that emulates the card 100 of the present disclosure can be simply attached to a reader or swipe box (or a new display / reader of the card 100 that is very similar to the card 100 of the present disclosure) have. It may also be necessary to load software into a POS system of a kind that is easily configurable or well known in the art to manage the proper operation of the elements described herein.

[0169] FIG. 15A is a front view of reader 1300a and legacy card reader 1200, which are transformation modifications of reader 1300 previously described herein. Reader 1300a includes a member 1422, a front panel 1424 and a plurality of sidewalls 1426 extending or protruding from the interior surface 1316 of the reader 1300a. In an exemplary embodiment, the protruding member 1422 extends vertically away from the inner surface 1316. Member 1422 is insertable into slot 1202 of legacy card reader 1200. While the member 1422 and sidewalls 1426 virtually shown behind the front panel 1424 are guided by the reader 1300a to cover the legacy reader 1200, other embodiments may include the extension 1422 and / (S) 1426, as shown in FIG. The adhesive 1428 may be positioned between the legacy reader 1200 and the reader 1300a to fix the reader 1300a to the legacy reader 1200. [ Reader 1300a and legacy reader 1200 may also be secured by fasteners, heat staking, and other fastening systems. Reader 1300a is positioned to sliding engagement with legacy reader 1200, as shown by arrow 1440; That is, the reader 1300a slides on the legacy reader 1200 while the protrusion or member 1422 slides into the slot 1202. When the reader 1300a and the legacy reader 1200 are positioned as shown in Figure 15b, the reader 1300a and the legacy reader 1200 form the combined reader assembly 1318. [ 15B is a front view of the combined reader assembly 1318. FIG.

[0170] 15C is a back view of a combined reader assembly 1318 showing a wiring configuration for connecting power and data lines between legacy reader 1200 and reader 1300a. The reader 1300 includes a power output connector 1438 and a data connector 1442 and the reader assembly 1318 includes an external power line or connection 1430, an external data line or connection 1432, A connection portion 1434, and an interconnect data line 1436. The external power line or connection 1430 provides functionality similar to the power supply line 1208 of a magnetic swipe or legacy reader 1200 and the external data line or connection 1432 provides a function similar to that of a magnetic swipe or legacy reader 1200, The data supply line 1210 of FIG. The external power line 1430 provides power to the reader assembly 1318 via a power connector 1309 and the external data line 1432 can be coupled to the data connector 1311 from a server, To reader assemblies 1318. The reader assemblies < RTI ID = 0.0 > 1318 < / RTI > The interconnecting power line 1434 extends between the power output connector 1438 and the power connector 1209 and the interconnect data line 1436 extends through the data connector 1211 positioned on the magnetic swipe or legacy reader 1200 ) And a data connector 1442 positioned on the reader 1300a and between the magnetic swipe or legacy reader 1200 and the reader 1300a a power and data tie-in to provide. Line 1434 is coupled to the power-input connector 1209 of the legacy reader 1200 and the power-output connector 1209 of the reader 1300 to provide a power tie-in, connection or link between the readers 1200 and 1300a 1438 and line 1436 connects between data-in connector 1211 and data-out connector 1430 to provide data tie-in, connection, or link between readers 1200 and 1300a Lt; / RTI >

[0171] Although FIG. 16A is a diagram of a tethered version of a user card 100 according to an exemplary embodiment, embodiments of the card 100 may be configured as tethered or non-tethered versions. A data device or patch code device 1510 may be coupled to another device 1502 and the data device or patch code device 1510 may include a head end 1514 for interfacing with the card 100 and an interface, A tail end 1516 connected to the device 1502 via a serial port of the device 1502 and a code 1518 configured to connect and attach the head end 1514 to the tail end 1516. [ (Including wiring and / or optical fibers). The tether device 1510 communicates with one or more layers of the card 100, such as those previously described herein. Thus, the tether or daughter device 1510 can communicate optically, magnetically, audibly, or through other methods.

The tether device 1510 can be used to collect data from the card 100 and transfer the data to another device, such as the device 1502. Tether 1510 is also configured to transfer data and / or power from device 1502 to card 100. The tether 1510 may also be used to configure and / or reset the card 100. The device 1502 may include, for example, a cell phone, a smartphone, an electronic tablet, a laptop computer, a transformer device that provides transformed power, a vehicle with a compatible or adaptable interface, and other devices. Contemporary versions of the multiple devices 1502 may include one or more ports such as FireWire ^TM , USB, HDMI, 100faseT, or some other Type serial or parallel port.

[0173] 16A illustrates an embodiment in which the tether device 1510 is magnetically attached to the main surface 101. The tether device 1510 may be attached to the major surface 101 of the card 100 or the main surface 101 of the card 100 in a number of ways. May be provided adjacent the surface 102 or may be secured to the main surface 101 or the major surface 102. These attachments may include a clip holding the head surface at surface 101 or surface 102 or some other mechanism for maintaining relative positioning between card 100 and tether 1510, Includes a physical bracket or clamp that holds the surface of the data 1510 to the surface 101 or surface 102 of the card 100, such as the head surface 1522a or 1522b, To provide a suction cup-type attachment, a magnetic attachment, or both on the tether head end 1514 for attachment to the card surface 101 or card surface 102 utilized. In another exemplary embodiment, the tether may include a plurality of tether head ends, each of which is configured to be positioned adjacent a surface 101 or surface 102, ) Surface, whereby communication through surface 101 and surface 102 can occur simultaneously. In yet another exemplary embodiment, a portion of the tether 1510 may be handheld relative to the card surface 101 or the card surface 102. In a further embodiment, the tether device 1510 may be part of a dual sided tether that allows for redundancy or higher data rates, and a clip, clamp, or bracket may be used to hold a plurality of surfaces The cards 100 can simultaneously hold on each side of the card 100, so that communication occurs simultaneously through the card surface 101 and the card surface 102. [ The clip may be attached to the head end 1514 of the tether 1510 and secured through magnetics to enable quick and easy separation of the head end 1514 from the card 100. [

[0174] 16B shows a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the tether 1510. Fig. The tether device 1510 may have an angled configuration (e.g., a right angle) (where the head 1514 encounters code 1518) or may not have any angle, such as an in-line configuration . The tether shown in Fig. 16B may be an in-line tether 1514 comprising a portion 1520 comprising a permanent magnet or electromagnet, or a magnet element which may be a ferromagnetic material attracted to a complementary ferromagnetic material, Or an electromagnet may be provided in the card 100. [ These complementary magnetic materials are formed in any shape and are positioned so that the tether head 1514 is attached to a predetermined area of the major surface 101 or 102. Output pixels 109 may include an attractive magnetic field that may be detected by moving the head end 1514 in an area proximate to the card surface 101 or the card surface 102. In other exemplary embodiments, Lt; / RTI >

[0175] In an embodiment, the light reception detection units 126 or 128, which operate in conjunction with the processor 110, recognize optical communication or image recognition between the card major surface and the tether head surface to identify a tether approaching On the approximated main surface 101 of the card 100 the area of the card 100 including the magnetic parts to which the tether head 1514 is to be attached, Or may be illuminated by emissions from other sources, or otherwise displayed. The tethered version of the card 100 may draw power from the host device 1502 to allow the card 100 to extend the operation of the power concentration elements, e.g., display-related elements . For example, the tether head 1514 can house a wireless power transfer mechanism, such as a solenoid, at the tip of the tether, which interacts with a coil (not shown) embedded in the card 100 to provide a charging current have. The tether can be modular. In an embodiment where a tethering is possible, the server 200 (Fig. 1) may determine whether the card 100 is close to a designated cell phone or mobile device. For example, the card 100 is more likely to be legitimately used by an authorized user if one or two designated devices are in proximity, and the card 100 is close If not, it can be disabled.

[0176] 16C is a front view of the tether 1510 showing the head surface 1522a of the head 1514. Fig. In an exemplary embodiment, the head surface 1522a may include optical elements and / or magnetic elements, such as, for example, a magnetic field that exists below the major surfaces 101 and 102 of the card 100, And inter-mixed arrays of light emitting pixels, light receiving / detecting pixels, magnetic-input pixels, and magnetic-output pixels, similar to optical elements. Tether head 1514 may be configured to transmit a serial or parallel data stream received from the serial port of tail end 1516 to data transmitted via optical and / or self-based channels established between card 100 and tether 1518 (E. G., Microelectronics). The tether head 1514 may also convert optical and / or magnetic data received from the card 100 into a serial or parallel data stream to be transmitted at the interface at the tail end 1516 of the tether 1510. The card 100 and the tether 1510 perform magnetic and / or optical handshaking when attached to the main surface 101 or the main surface 102, Communicates identification information, and optically and magnetically communicates with the connected device 1502. Thus, the tether 1510 can deliver industry standard communication formats at the tail end 1516 via a conversion electronics that is housed in the tether 1510, e.g., the head 1514 and powered. It should be understood that the head surface 1522a may include only any subset of intermixed pixel arrays, e.g., only light emitting pixels and light receiving / detecting pixels. The tail ends of the tethers, e.g., the tail end 1516 shown in FIG. 16B, may include common devices such as ear buds, headsets, speakers, etc., instead of a serial or parallel interface.

[0177] 16D is a side view of tether 1510a and tether 1510a includes heads 1514a and 1514b connected by cords 1518a to respective ends of tether 1510a. Each of the heads 1514a and 1514b is substantially identical and may be substantially the same or similar to the head 1514 previously described herein. The present embodiment provides an optical connection between one head end 1514a of the tether 1510a and the card 100 and an optical connection between the other head end 1514b of the tether 1510a and another optical and / Lt; / RTI > For example, the tether 1510a may be used to transmit data optically transmitted from the card 100 to a computer display or cell phone, which includes a intermixed array (not shown) similar to the card 100 . In the exemplary embodiment, each head end 1514a and head end 1514b includes a conversion circuit (e. G., Microelectronics). For example, one or more of the CCD pixels provided in one tether head end 1514a can receive one or more photon streams received from the card 100 and convert the received photon stream into an electrical signal Which in turn is converted back to the photon stream by the conversion circuit at the other tether head end 1514b. A similar conversion can be made in the opposite direction from the tether head end 1514b to the tether head end 1514a.

[0178] In another embodiment, the tether 1510a may include optical channels through the entire length of the code 1518a, such that the conversion circuit previously described herein is not required. FIG. 16E is a front or back side view of the head 1514c, wherein the surface 1522b of the head 1514c includes at least one optical fiber 1524. FIG. Although FIG. 16E shows a bundle of seven discrete optical fibers, the head 1514c may include more or less fibers.

[0179] In an embodiment, card 100 and system 1 allow cloning of cards. Card-to-card cloning can be recognized, for example, by considering the cards shown in Figures 10B-10C, where card 100d is the card to be cloned, or " And the card 100c is the destination card according to the present disclosure. Figures 17A and 17B illustrate an exemplary legacy card 1600 that may be cloned using card 100. 17A, the first major surface 1601 of the legacy card 1600 includes a driver's license, an image of a licensee 1602, a fingerprint image 1604 of a licensee, a smaller licensee image 1606, Retinal scan 1608, and other information and images, such as identification information, expiration date, watermark 1616, and / or hologram 1618. 17B shows a second main surface 1612 of legacy card 1600, which may include magnetic stripe 1612, bar code (not shown), watermark 1616 and other information typically found on the opposite side of the license 1610 < / RTI > Of course, FIGS. 17A and 17B illustrate only one type of a plurality of or apparently endlessly various cards that can be cloned using card 100 and system 1, in accordance with the present disclosure. Cards of the "clone-able" type include other cards 100, credit cards, bank cards, business cards, intermediary cards, security identification cards, do. As another example, a social security card may be among items that are stored in card 100 or accessible to card 100, whereby card 100 and system 1 may be stored in an official single-or- Multi-identification cards or as a secure repository and display of displayable information.

[0180] Each clone operation can be tracked by both the transmitting or receiving card 100 and the receiving card 100 and thus a clone "trail" can be detected to help ensure that only authorized cloning is performed have. Parents, relatives, friends, partners, etc. may want to clone a limited portion of their card for use by others. Since the card 100 includes the ability to obtain biometric information from the users of the card 100, the card 100 may be transmitted from the authorized holder of the card 100 to the living body Measurement information may be requested. Such biometric data will be included as part of the clone "trail" so that permissions are recorded for traceability. The order of cloning is also tracked as part of the clone "trail" so that each parent card 100 is known by the child card 100. In the exemplary embodiment, each card 100 has its own unique identifier for traceability. As can be seen, card 100 and system 1 can provide positive, secure, reliable, encrypted information, e.g., identification information, for a user.

[0181] FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating a cloning operation performed between the card 100 and the legacy card 1600. FIG. The card 100 in the form of a full size credit card is a card 100 of a card 100 facing the first main surface 1601 as indicated by a plurality of arrows 1614 between the cards, Or all artifacts existing on the first main surface 1601 of the card 1600 using the first or second light detection unit 126 or 128 under the main surface 102 ), Text, graphics, images, holograms, and the like. After capturing the information on the first major surface 1601, the card 1600 is flipped and the process is repeated to capture information on the second major surface 1610. The captured information of the card 1600 may be transferred to the database 250 accessible by the card 100 and / or the server 200 (see FIG. 1), e.g., transaction / ID / access card management unit 234, And may be stored in the memory 114 of the computer 100. When selected, the captured images of the main surfaces 1601 and 1610 of the card 1600 can be displayed with mirror-image correction and can be displayed simultaneously with mirror-image correction, Is a digital clone of the legacy card 1600. It should be appreciated that some legacy cards may require only a single side of the card to be captured. In this situation, an embodiment of the card 100 may be configured to display a single side image of the card captured on only one major surface 101 or 102 of the card 100, Both 101 and 102 can display the same single side captured image.

[0182] The magnetic stripe (or magnetic layer) used to communicate or handshake during cloning helps to maintain the imitation device from the stack. In other words, the combination of the optical image and the magnetic stripe very close to the card 100 makes it very difficult for a public enemy to start a mix without making a complete imitation device. Without the proprietary encryption combinations disclosed herein, if a counterfeit is required for a handshake and sets up its own magnetic stripe or magnetic image using portions of the entire surface for a second stage handshake, this will fail. Additionally, there are common standards in data processing, including encryption during transmission and reception. In some embodiments, the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein emphasize the initialization of the connection and only the primary or initial handshake. These steps may also include aural embodiments described throughout this disclosure in connection with the piezoelectric elements included in the card 100 such that the entire surface on both sides of the card 100, It is possible to add an audible third-order function of sound out and sound in over the first time.

[0183] In another embodiment, a card associated with a medical insurance or other medical product service may be emulated or cloned using the card 100 and the system 1. In this case, the medical card will probably not have any magnetic stripe, but instead may include a location where there may be a magnetic stripe, perhaps a bar code, a Qr code, etc., on the back side of the card. Especially when both sides are required to be imaged, it is possible that the emulation of such a card will not be properly displayed. Typically, such cards are read by medical support personnel who may be in a small office or hospital environment where magnetic stripe equipment may not be available, but nevertheless optical capture of important images may occur.

[0184] Such medical-related cards are often required to be further cloned. In the United States, for example, health insurance is often linked to a job, and thus, in any given home, many people may be required to own the card, although one person may be the owner of the card primarily.

[0185] In the case of medical cards, the benefits for secure transactions may include not only verifying that the card user is authorized, but also avoiding medical errors. According to an exemplary embodiment, even if a person is unconscious or unresponsive, such as in the case of an accidental patient with a known condition or an anesthetized person scheduled for surgery, the particular procedure or diagnosis may be reliably associated with a particular person . In such a case, biometric authentication of a person, such as a fingerprint, can be easily made available. Thus, biometrics and other identification information can be validated on the way to the operating room, so that corrective surgery is applied to the right arm of the right person, for example. The same card may still contain all the information related to diagnosis, provision of secondary medical care, such as physical therapy, allergies, prescription, and the like. Thus, a firmly tracked person can be transferred to another facility, possibly even at the last minute, without fear of losing track of information. Of course, the same virtual card with other stored cards may also allow an enterprising user to negotiate treatment rates and other details while still in the medical waiting room, , It can be used to simply pay for wireless parking for ongoing parking or to make an appropriate purchase. As mentioned elsewhere, since the device provides the purposes of value to the hospital, it may be desirable to allow patients to use the device in a manner that does not unduly interfere with cell phones in a manner known in such circumstances , There is incentive for the same hospital. The clinic may be authorized to limit the use of the device by limiting the access to the local wireless and wired networks, if required or required, or by limiting the types of communication being done through local wireless and wired networks Lt; / RTI >

[0186] As technology developments evolve, the card 100 has more pixel density (light emission, light reception, magnetic-output, magnetic-input, piezoelectric-input, piezoelectric-output, etc.) per unit of measurement . Thus, newer versions of cards 100 are always able to receive data from older versions of cards 100. Compatibility for basic card-to-card communications (i.e., face-to-face) is ensured because the card 100 and the card 100 'shown in FIG. 18A, ), The increased pixel density requires only knowledge of the alignment method to prevent misalignment. 18B, an earlier card 100 according to the present disclosure may have a pixel density of X x Y, and a newer "next generation" card 100 ' For example, 10 x 10 Y, as shown by relatively darker shading. The newer card 100 'may be auto-programmed for compatible data transfer, by array assignment on a block-by-block basis. For example, as shown in FIG. 18B, one pixel 1700 of the card 100 may be translated into 100 pixels 1710 of the card 100 '.

[0187] In an embodiment in which two cards 100 or other devices including a technique similar to card 100 and card 100 have differently sized major surfaces, data can be spread over the entire surface of the smallest bi- That is, a larger display is used to self-sizing or auto-sizing a larger bi-directional display to a smaller bi-directional display, as shown in Figure 18c, Down to a pixel unit in a more well-ordered situation, or to a smaller number of pixels in overlapping regions. As shown in Fig. 18C, the smaller card 100 is disposed in a superposed manner with respect to a larger surface 100i including a display technology similar to the card 100. Fig. The transmission of data may utilize the maximum number of available communication pixels based on a minimum common denominator of available communication pixels, alignment, and the like.

[0188] In this way, the present invention provides a device that incentivizes the user to adapt this particular form factor with maximum bidirectional display instead of other solutions while maintaining all POS and Internet marketing capabilities.

[0189] The above example illustrates perhaps one of the unique techniques that allow the form factor of a card to increase its throughput 100 times as the technology evolves, while facilitating communication with outdated cards. It is not necessary to change the description of the data transmitting and receiving means, and it is not necessary to change the individual pixel emission or individual optical detection (e.g., CCD) correction algorithm, and even then, The density only changes until such time as it can still be automatically supported by including an algorithm for translating or modifying the communication of the previous card into a form understood by the card 100 '. As the densities become higher over the surface of the card 100, it becomes even more possible to increase the presence of invisible watermarks, pixels that do not damage the image, because the human eye can not detect them Because. However, advanced software may detect invisible emissions from pixels that are intended to provide a unique identifier and authentication methods for the image, e.g., watermarking. One way to achieve this is to use a very specific frequency for the pixels representing the watermark. Another method is to know which pixels are intended for human viewing and which pixels will be interpreted as more than the image forming the watermark when the image is properly rasterized.

[0190] Returning now to Figure 1, the functions performed by the server 200 are now described in more detail. The server 200 includes a processor 228, a plurality of functional units, and a database 250 for performing various functions of the system 1. The functional unit includes a card / user authentication unit 230, a value analysis unit 232, a transaction / ID / access card management unit 234, a tracking unit 236 for tracking card usage, a card 100, Patterns and other history information, a docking unit 238 for managing the docking of various devices and cards 100, and a data transfer management unit 240 for managing data exchange functions not handled by the card 100 However, embodiments of the server 200 may include additional or fewer functional units.

[0191] The card / user authentication unit 230 handles processes related to identification, login, logout, and related security features. In an exemplary embodiment, the card / user authentication unit 230 requires a "hard login" by the user, including taking a series of biometric readings from the card user via the authentication unit 142 of the card 100 Which can be as varied as needed and available and can be performed in a given sequence to uniquely identify the user with the absolutely perfect certainty and to identify the identified user to the card 100 and the service support card 100 ). The additional use (each actual use) of the card 100 is still the same as the security aspect of the card 100, either as a system request or as the user desires, which may be periodic or periodic, , It may require a minimum uncertain biometric log, or "soft log," as compared to a hard log. If the user drops or loses the card 100, the time elapsed from the event, the proximity (distance) from the card 100 detected by another sculpted element carried by the user, or a predetermined number of failed Based on the soft login attempt, the card 100 may log out partially or completely to recover the function of the card 100 and proceed to a full security mode requiring a maximum number of login steps.

In an exemplary embodiment, the login of the card 100 may be moved to the computer and electronic device screens, and once the user logs in to the card 100, during the hard log period (eg, after one day) Logging to the machines can be accomplished by holding or swiping the card 100 against a screen of another computer or other electronic device at a specified time and place (e.g., a larger screen of a computer or other device) It can tell the user where to place the card 100 for logging or other data transfer). Thus, the assurance from the card 100 that the user is identified and the assurance from the service support card 100 are passed to a simpler step than a series of complicated and time consuming steps. The user may go through complicated logging steps once per day, and the user may be prompted for any size or type of transaction to require more complex logging steps, for shorter forms of logging (less biometric verification) And how long these complex logging steps are to be held until they want the associated service or are again required. Thereafter, logging to services via a machine, for example provided as traversing the network, satisfies and replaces old-fashioned logging tests such as CAPCHA ^TM (Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart) The hard and soft logging functions of the card 100 can be achieved. In an exemplary embodiment, the card / user authentication unit 230 is configured to allow the card 100 to communicate with the card 100, such that, essentially, in near real time or in real time, the card 100 is used for any transaction, The authentication unit 142 may enable users to take at least one and preferably two or more forms of biometric readings and may be able to take affirmative (biometric) measurements to protect the user from identity theft or other forms of fraud Confirmation) If the biometric data does not exist within a predetermined minimum time, e.g., within a few seconds of card reading or recording, the card 100 may be terminated and the transaction may be stopped. The level or hierarchy of biometric required for the transaction may be set by the system 1 and / or by a preference of the card user or by a combination of both the system 1 and the card user. For example, a user may set up a layer that requires at least one biometric type reading than a layer of biometric reading (s) set by system 1. [ Moreover, the user can set a first transaction level that requires a single biometric and password, which can access card information, the ability to replicate certain card information, financial transactions, and the like. The higher level of access to card information, the ability to replicate more card 100 information, higher price financial transactions, etc. requires a more detailed login procedure that includes both biometric inputs and more complex passwords can do. Each level of access to card 100 requires an increased level of risk and identification for unauthorized users that are automatically detected and reported by card 100.

[0193] As can be appreciated, the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein may be used to perform a less frequent deep, extensive, multi-step login procedure, and more frequently performed, e.g., Allowing for a high security usage of all of their capabilities and the card 100 through a low depth and a wide range of login procedures. Although in a time consuming manner, the in-depth log-in procedure thereafter allows the user to re-use the card 100 with a low-depth login procedure within a given amount of time, or if a proximity alarm or any other alarm (e.g., tamper alarm) Leverages the fact that it will not be completely logged off from the system 1 unless a tripped and in-depth login procedure is forced to be performed again. Because all procedures are encrypted and complex, such as high-resolution reads of fingerprints, in-depth login procedures that are enduring all day under these specific circumstances are compared to requiring only a deeper login procedure per transaction without a deeper login procedure To provide a fairly high degree of protection for the user.

[0194] In another exemplary embodiment, a Killian check of an object may be added to a biometric login function that is handled by the authentication unit 142 of the card 100 and / or the card / user authentication unit 230 of the server 200 . In this embodiment, the card 100 may provide a charge coupled device (CCD) or optical read elements and magnetic read elements, which may be coupled with the authentication unit 142 and / or the card / user authentication unit 230 , The finger's spectrum, the carillian field of the object, or the magnetic field of the object, or both, to the extent that it maps to video and still images. That is, by carefully examining the video frames of the stills, or magnetic fields, or both, of the objects, that is, the shot in the order in which the shots were taken and in the time lag, and the authentication unit 142 ) Or the card / user authentication unit 230 may derive a result for the object. One such decision is the presence of pulses due to capillary action and heartbeat of living mammals. Another determination is to analyze the fingerprint or fingerprint of the user's finger. Another determination is micro-pulse placement within a capillary system that is unique to each person, such as a fingerprint, and the overlay map of micro-pulses, capillaries, and fingerprints is equally unique to each individual. By combining this type of data with other metrics, such as a capillary pattern, the login function can take this combination of data and process it to determine if the threshold for the pass (or failure / rejection) has been met. It should be noted that these same features provide the ability to detect the presence of a user of the card 100 in a mode of "still here" If the user places the card 100 in a pocket, purse, or other position where biometric information is no longer available, the card 100 may assume that the user is no longer actively using the card 100, The card 100 then enters the standby or shutdown mode and automatically locks the card 100 for use until appropriate biometric measurements are available.

[0195] The value analysis unit 232 performs tasks such as cutting, carrying, or even scanning coupons and other discount codes, which are generally associated with the user, and automatically determines if the offers are available locally. In an exemplary embodiment, when the user is at a given location, the value analysis unit 232 may utilize the location information generated by the location unit 144 of the card 100 and search the network 210 to determine It makes a transaction or other suggestion to inform the user of these other opportunities belonging to the transaction or hand transaction that the user has indicated to perform, and generates a message to determine the local or nearby stores communicating with the card 100. Thus, while the user is in the process of shopping for and purchasing products and services, the user can continue to recognize details about other transactions that may be available nearby. In an embodiment, the value analysis unit 232 may notify the user of offers or opportunities related to the transaction of the process being performed but not yet completed, which may be located in the brick and mortar benches, Is not.

[0196] In an exemplary embodiment, the services in the vane analyzing unit 232 or alternatively the card 100 may filter the variety of what is considered as unwanted advertisement (s) as part of the service support card 100, Or may provide a number of filters or pre-requisites or preferences that the user sets to indicate the willingness to obtain the specific information provided by the brokers.

[0197] The disclosed card 100 and system 1 allow simple and extensive contracts to personalize the content of user request information. For example, if a card user creates a desired list and the item on the shopping or desired list is delivered from the system 1 with a discount of more than 80%, then the user is informed that the object meeting his criterion is available, The proximity may be another factor set by the user as a filter that may be the distance to the item in question. In another embodiment, if the card 100 user finds a particular offer for a particular item, the card 100 may be based on whether the participating companies have signed the offer and provide this information over the Internet or wireless network. May provide automatic notifications to users of companies participating in the offer.

[0198] The transaction / ID / access card management unit 234 of the server 200 performs credit card functions (e.g., managing credit card functions) for the card 100. [ In an exemplary embodiment, card 100 may have a full form compatible with a credit card and other existing embedded card swipe or read mechanisms. Thus, the card 100 has access to the prior art of magnetic swipe, so any "magnetic swipe" or any legacy slot type inserted magnetic reader is immediately compatible. Because there is a display, many boundaries become "unbounded ". For example, it becomes unnecessary to display the credit card number, and the display function of the card 100 can be set to display only the last four digits, for example. When the user selects the function of the card 100, the user can see all available information when requested or requested. It should be borne in mind that one use of the card 100 performs a full scan at once on all hard cards, front and back, face-to-face, and then emulates by the display.

[0199] 20-23 illustrate an exemplary embodiment of a card 100j that interfaces with a previous reader while in a fixed position. Card 100j includes a photodetection pixel element 148 and magnetic output pixels 113, as described above with respect to card 100 and as discussed above with respect to card 100. [ By implementing the legacy stripe emulation module and the legacy stripe emulation process, the card 100j can interface with the legacy card reader while keeping it in a fixed position. Card 100j can obtain such data in a form that can be read by legacy card reader 212 because card 100j can obtain data from many sources, e.g., RFID, optical, magnetic, Preparation and / or conversion.

[0200] Referring to Fig. 22, a legacy stripe emulation module is shown and generally designated 280, which is compatible with the card readers shown in Figs. 13-15. The legacy stripe emulation module 280 includes a sensor data module 282, a sensor data analysis module 284, a magnetic head zone module 286, a data redundancy module 288 and a data transmission module 290. The legacy stripe emulation module 280 may be partially positioned or locally to the processor 110, to the magnetic output layers 190a and / or 190b, or to other appropriate locations of the card 100. [ The legacy stripe emulation module 280 may receive the initial legacy reader interface signal and cause the sensor data module 282 to operate. The initial legacy reader interface signal may be a signal from a module (not shown) of the processor 110 that periodically causes the legacy stripe emulation module 280 to recognize or search and perform the legacy card reader, e.g., legacy card reader 1200 Or the user may select the legacy card reader function of the card 100 and the reader function then transfers the initial legacy reader interface signal to the sensor data module 282.

[0201] When the sensor data module 282 receives the initial legacy read interface signal, the sensor data module 282 generates various sensor pixel element types located on the card 100, for example, Although it begins to accept data from the pixel elements 148, other sensor inputs may also be used. The data received from one or more of the pixel element types is configured to be analyzed and then sent to the sensor data analysis module 284. The sensor data analysis module 284 analyzes the data received from the sensor data module 282 and searches for a magnetic read head, e.g., a magnetic read head 1212. The sensor data analysis module 284 may continue until the user of the card 100 stops operating the legacy stripe emulation module 280 or until a predetermined time interval passes without looking for the magnetic read head, And continues to search the magnetic read head until the read head is located. Once the magnetic read head is identified from the received sensor data, the position of the magnetic read head, which may be associated with the coordinates for various pixel elements on the card 100, is transferred to the magnetic head zone module 286. The magnetic head zone module 286 is configured to define a zone of the magnetic output pixel layer 190a or 190b of the card 100 as an interface location or pixel operating zone for communication between the card 100 and the magnetic read head, And uses the location information provided by module 284. Once the interface location or pixel operating zone is defined, the magnetic head zone module 286 sends a signal to the data preparation module 288 where the sensor data to be transmitted to the legacy card reader can be received. The data preparation module 288 may be adapted to receive data from one or more sensors on the card 100, such as RFID data, optical data from the photodetection pixel layer 186a or 186b, a piezoelectric input pixel layer 194a or 194b And translates and prepares the received data to be transmitted to the magnetic output pixels 109 located in the interface location or pixel operating zone. The data to be transmitted to the magnetic read head is then passed to the data transmit module 290 where the data is converted to magnetic data for transmission to the magnetic read head.

[0202] Referring to FIG. 23, a legacy stripe emulation process is shown, generally indicated at 300. The legacy stripe emulation process 300 may be located in one or more portions of the card 100 shown in FIG. 2 and may include one or more of the modules of the legacy stripe emulation module 280 shown in FIG. 22, Lt; / RTI > at least partially. The legacy stripe emulation process 300 begins with a start process 302 where the processor 110 sets any desired values and registers for the remainder of the process 300. The process 300 then moves from the initiating process 302 to the incoming sensor data process 304. Optical data from the first optical detection unit 126 and the second optical detection unit 128 are provided to the sensor data module 282 and the sensor data module 282 is provided to the A processor, such as processor 110, The process 300 then moves from the receive sensor data process 304 to the magnetic read head definition process 306. In the magnetic read head process 306, the sensor data analysis module 284, which may include the processor 110, uses the information captured during the process 304 to define or detect the position of the legacy card reader's magnetic read head do. Once the position of the magnetic read head is identified, the process 300 moves from the magnetic read head definition process 306 to the definition pixel operation zone process 308. [ In process 308, using the position of the magnetic read head, the magnetic head zone module including the processor 110 defines a magnetic-output pixel operating zone 320. The process 300 then moves from the definition pixel operation zone process 308 to the receive data process 310. In the receive data process, one or more sensor layers receive or capture data from one or more sources, such as RFID sources, optical sources, or other sources having sensors to detect the card lOOj. Once the data is received, the legacy stripe emulation process 300 transfers control from the receive data process 310 to the prepare data process 312 where the data to be sent from the magnetic read head is sent to the data preparation module 288 . In the preparation data process 312, the process 300 moves to the working pixel zone process 314 where each item of data is stored in the magnetic-output pixel operating zone 320, Zone 320, which is performed by the data transmission module 290. Figure 21 shows a stylized sequence of the magnetic-output pixel operating zone 320 where 320a, 320b, 320c, 320d, 320e and 320f are sequential data elements capable of representing numbers, characters, Output pixel operating zone 320 having a plurality of pixels or items. Due to the operating speed of the pixel operating zone 320 in a stationary or static position on the card 100j, the legacy reader is positioned in the fixed relationship with the legacy card reader in this embodiment, but the card 100j ). Once all of the data has been transmitted through the pixel operating zone 320, the process 300 moves from the working pixel zone process 314 to the termination process 316 and the termination process 316 moves to the working pixel zone process 314, Lt; / RTI > Due to the strength of the magnetic read head of the legacy card reader, the card 100 can be positioned to detect feedback from the legacy card reader as to whether the transmission was properly received by the legacy card reader. If a signal is not received or an error occurs, the processor 110 may be configured to automatically transmit the same data stream again automatically, without operator intervention, by using the pixel layers described herein, 110 prompts the operator through the visual or audible output to allow the operator to authorize the retransmission or other operation, such as from the failed light emitting pixel layer 198 or the piezoelectric-output pixel layer 196a or 196b can do. As mentioned above, this transmission of magnetic data may also be automatic at a plurality of levels for the intensity expected by the magnetic read head, such as low, medium and high, and the information may be in a first direction and a second direction Lt; / RTI > As noted above, the value of this process will accommodate variations between magnetic read heads, including wear or tiers for the magnetic read head.

[0203] Embodiments of the card 100 and the system 1 may be configured to communicate items (e.g., items associated with goods, services, rentals, or financial transactions) in a pending purchase via the communication unit 118 and the network 210, Or by automating access to the contents of the servers on the networks through mining of data related to items that the user may consider in the purchase process, rather than merely obtaining information from the server 200, Information can be provided to the server 200, redirected to another endpoint on the network 210, or redirected from one place to another with the help of the server 200 only. The ability to provide data as well as access data is a dynamic, enabling the user to traverse one or more benches over time, shop for items, and scan them in the updating server 200 So that when the user arrives at the exit of the venue for a final checkout, the pre-processed voucher and all the transactions intended as one master transaction can be presented as completed, As is processed at the server 200, processing of transactions and collection of any benefits, discounts, and coupons can occur automatically. The tabulation may occur without any perceived delay to the user or other customers standing in line (e.g., standing in line behind the user). Although the card 100 itself may only have a memory capacity of x, the method may even require that the card 100 be accessed, indicated and controlled at a rate of one million times x and x up to exponentially larger steel Allows much larger capacities. In a sense, the card 100 may be, for example, stored in the database 250 and the service backing card 100 in a manner such that the storage capacity available to the card 100 in the server 200, It can serve as a highly advanced memory stick with limited storage capacity.

[0204] Through the admission of the user of the card 100, the card 100 also provides data mining capabilities for the venues, producers, This information, which is limited to specific information selectable by the user, such as shopping patterns, proposed uses, purchased specific items, visited venues, shopping-related research, May be sold or provided to participating venues, producers, etc. in exchange for special sales, evolving announcements of sales, additional discounts, etc.

[0205] Card 100 also provides payment options based on the Venue. For example, if a user of card 100 typically uses a particular form of payment in a particular venue, card 100 may provide the user with an opportunity to accept the implied default card before the card 100 makes a payment , But the payment type can be considered by default. The user of the card 100 may also pre-identify the forms of payment for the particular venue. For example, a user may set a payment method 1 for Venue A, a payment method 2 for Venue B, and a combination of Payment Method 3 and Payment Method 4 for Venue C using the ratio between Payment Method 3 and Payment Method 4 . In another example, the user can set up a payment method 1 for all food related purchases, a payment method 2 for housewares, and a payment method 3 for office supplies. These examples present only two of the unrestricted possibilities for establishing the relationships between the payment methods and the plans, and these relationships can be set automatically so that the payment is presented without further action by the user at checkout, Or the user may be queried by the card 100 to verify that the established payment type is the desired payment type.

[0206] In an exemplary transactional application, the card 100 is used to scan items, identify items, and communicate with the server 200. The value analysis unit 232 of the server 200 may determine that the online venture has a better price or other better value for the item compared to the current Venue and can make purchases on the online venture, To alarm; (2) using the location information from the location unit 144 to alert the user that the item is available at another location, e.g., a location near the location of the user, at a lower price; And (3) whether the item price is an acceptable price, as determined by the value analysis unit 232, and whether the user will hold the item or put it back on the shelf (second scan or other action on the card Can " update "back off" state). This process may be repeated for all the items that the user considers the use of the card 100 and for the items being scanned rather than "put back" to the user's cart (which may be a real or virtual cart) . Card 100 maintains a list of items maintained in each (i.e., in the cart) and card 100 forwards the list to server 200 via value analysis unit 232. Until it is checked out, the value analysis unit 232 can continue to search for all available benefits associated with each maintained item. At check-out, the server 100 electronically transmits a list of items to be maintained to the POS system of the Venue, although the server 200 may deliver all the items in the cart to the POS system via the network 210. [ In an automated embodiment, the server 200 forwards the list and all collected related privileges to the POS system, and the POS system resells privileges with prices and charges the user account. In another embodiment, the POS system may handle some or all of the functions performed by the server 200. In a system that does not participate in the legacy system or the resolution of automatic checkouts and benefits, the card 100 may present images of bar codes to coupons or similar items that the user can exchange at the POS system to the user . The value analysis unit 232 or the transaction / ID / access card management unit 234 can automatically select the payment method card stored in the card 100 at or before the time to pay, The card of the card 100 may display the selected payment card, or the last used payment card (e.g., according to preferences) may be displayed , The card 100 also displays the magnetic output data associated with the selected payment method. The user can close or complete the transaction card by scratching the card 100 with the selected and displayed payment method and providing a signature. As part of the end of the transaction, the receipt may be stored on the card 100, personal computer, personal external storage, cloud or other suitable storage locations for later reference or archiving at the server 200. Other information may be associated with the end of the transaction, such as the date and time of storage of the transaction, the associated price protection, or whether there is a guaranteed lower price.

[0207] In the post-transaction, the value analysis unit 232 may select XXXCreditCorp, for example, agreeing to the conditions associated with the use of the card 100. [ The server 200 may: re-pay each item separately or even using multiple payment methods based on information in the transaction / ID / access card management unit 234 associated with the cards stored here Pay for one individual item; Apply the coupons or other privileges used on a limited date as a price protection guarantee; Apply rebates; Provide information related to extended quality assurance, and secure extended quality assurance; And post-transaction, re-address, and transaction for other post-transaction conditions included through consent. The post-transaction operations may be preset by the system 1, or may be preference-based. The "optimal value" is used herein to denote, but is not limited to, discounts from coupons, reductions in prices from special discounts, promotions, gifts, and the like. The "optimum value" may be defined by the user of the card 100 and may include other factors, such as buy-one get-one, free shipping, extended warranty, rebates, Discounts for additional purchases, gas points, and the like.

[0208] Many of the capabilities and other aspects of the user card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure may be implemented in a computer system or other hardware capable of executing the programmed instructions, such as a general purpose computer, a personal computer (PC) , A mobile telephone with data processing capability, an RFID receiver, a game console, an electronic notepad, a laptop computer, a GPS (global positioning system) receiver, or other programmable data Described are sequences of operations to be performed by a processor or controller, which may be elements of a processing device. In each of the embodiments, the various operations may be performed by one or more processors (e.g., one or more microprocessors) by specialized circuits (e.g., discrete logic gates interconnected to perform a specialized function) , Microcontrollers, a central processing unit (CPU), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors (DSPs), digital signal processing devices (DSPDs), digital signal processing devices programmable gate arrays) and other devices designed to perform the functions described herein, such as program instructions (software), such as logic blocks, program modules, and / or any of the above ≪ / RTI > For example, embodiments may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, middleware, microcode, or any combination thereof. The instructions may be program code or code segments that perform the necessary tasks and may be stored in a non-transient machine-readable medium, such as a storage medium or other storage device (s). A code segment may represent any combination of a procedure, a function, a subprogram, a program, a routine, a subroutine, a module, a software package, a class, or instructions, data structures or program statements. A code segment may be coupled to a hardware circuit or other code segment by conveying and / or receiving information, data, arguments, parameters or memory contents.

 [0209] The circuitry and other hardware of the communication unit 118 of the card 100 such as a transmitter, a receiver, a transmitting unit, a receiving unit, a transceiver, etc. may be used in various wireless communication networks such as WWAN, WLAN, WPAN, To provide functionality. The terms network and system are often used interchangeably herein. The WWAN can be a CDMA network, a TDMA network, an FDMA network, an OFDMA network, an SC-FDMA network, an LTE (Long Term Evolution) network, or the like. A CDMA network may implement one or more radio access technologies (RAT) such as CDMA2000, W-CDMA (Wideband-CDMA), and the like. CDMA2000 includes IS-95, IS2000, and IS-856 standards. The TDMA network may implement GSM, Digital Advanced Phone System (D-AMPS), or some other RAT. GSM and W-CDMA are described in documents from a consortium named "3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) ". CDMA2000 is described in documents from a consortium named "3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2) ". The WLAN may be an IEEE 802.11x network, the WPAN may be a Bluetooth network, IEEE 802.15x, or some other type of network, and CDMA may be implemented as a radio technology such as universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) or CDMA2000, The TDMA may be implemented as a radio technology such as GSM / GPRS / EDGE (enhanced data rates for GSM evolution). OFDMA may be implemented by radio technologies such as IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802.20, evolved UTRA (E-UTRA) The techniques may also be used for any combination of WWAN, WLAN and / or WPAN. Techniques may be implemented for use by a UMB (Ultra Mobile Broadband) network, a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) network, a CDMA2000 IX network, GSM, Long Term Evolution (LTE)

[0210] In an exemplary embodiment, a Quantum Entanglement Device (QED) may be introduced to intermix quantum computing and quantum communications within the system 1 and the card 100, Security. At some point it will be feasible to have one side of the card 100 with QEDs that generate and detect pixels, two sides of the card 100 and / or all the surfaces of the card 100. When the point-of-sale systems include QED capabilities and when a public quantum entanglement network is established, both the various methods and capabilities of system 1 and card 100 will be enhanced to such an extent that communications are fully secured. In an exemplary embodiment, the items to be scanned, which may include type items such as another card 100, or a stored or intangible item such as a service agreement or a website, may be coupled to known entangled particles stored in a quantum entangled trap Quantum entangled particles, which may be photons, electrons or other particles. Through this evolution, an item that is marked with a quantum entangled particle can be identified as to its authenticity, its history, and up to its unique instance of the item.

As used herein, the term "memory" refers to any type of non-transient machine-readable medium, whether long term, short term, volatile, non-volatile, or other memory , And the number of memory or memories of any particular type, or the type of medium in which the memory is stored. The memory, such as system memory 114 and database 250, described herein may additionally include any type of computer readable carrier, such as solid state memory, magnetic disk, and a suitable set of computer instructions, , And data structures that allow a processor to perform the processes described herein. The computer-readable medium may be any of the following: electrical connection with one or more wires, magnetic disk storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape or other magnetic and optical storage devices (e.g., compact disk (CD), a laser disk, a digital versatile disk (DVD), a floppy disk and a Blu-ray ^™ disk), a portable computer diskette, a random access memory (RAM), a read only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read only memory (E. G., EPROM, EEPROM, or flash memory), or any other type of medium capable of storing information and combinations of the above. The memory may also include a buffer memory that holds the transmission data to be transmitted by the transmitter of the communication unit 118 until such data is transmitted and / And holds the received data until such received data can be processed. Although FIG. 2 illustrates memory 114 as being separate from or otherwise external to the processor or controller 110, the memory may be implemented within a processor or controller 110 or other processing unit .

[0212] In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 has a credit card form factor, size, shape, and thickness of a standard swipe card, and the processor 110 preferably uses a card operating system (COS) (Microprocessor or microcontroller chip) that manages the files stored in the memory 114 allocated to the card applications, and the memory for performing these functions is preferably nonvolatile (e.g., EEPROM or flash) and volatile , ROM) solid state devices, each of which is configured to be non-transient. In the exemplary embodiment, the type of COS used in card 100 is a dynamic application card operation that allows developers to reliably build, test, and store various card applications It is a system. The card memory also includes at least one programmable magnetic stripe for magnetically storing information.

[0213] It should be noted that the system of the present disclosure is illustrated and discussed herein as having various modules and / or units that perform particular functions. It should be understood that these modules and units are merely schematically illustrated based on their functionality for purposes of clarity and are not necessarily representative of specific hardware and / or software. In this regard, these modules, units, and other components may be hardware and / or software that is implemented to substantially perform certain of their functions described herein. The various functions of the different components may be combined or separated in hardware and / or software modules in any manner, and may be available individually or in combination. Accordingly, various aspects of the present disclosure may be embodied in many different forms and all such forms are contemplated as being within the scope of the present disclosure.

[0214] FIG. 19 is a timing diagram illustrating timing and synchronization between two or more devices, where at least one device is a venue processor and the other device is similar to card 100. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 19 having two cards (Card1 and Card2), at least some data must be relayed through a processor of a middle card, for example a Card2 processor, and an acknowledgment, timing, or other data May also be often delivered in a direction opposite to the data transfer direction. Card2 may, for example, belong to a cashier, manager, or other person associated with a transaction, and Cardl may belong to an end user purchasing a product or service. The external processor documents the transaction and the net amount to the user and / or the intermediate party, or to the user and / or the intermediate party, from the benign or from the benign. The processor latencies are schematically illustrated for a system that may include multiple cards and / or an external processor. As can be understood by considering the timing diagram shown in Fig. 19, the latency and processing time for the POS is reduced, where p1 and p2 are the data from Cardl and Card2, and E is the available data for data collection Processor time. The external processor provides timing or clocking information to the processors of Cardl and Card2, which change their clocking from a free-running mode to a synchronous mode, The data is transferred from the memory or processors of Card 1 and Card 2 so that the time for transferring data from Card 1 or Card 2 is reduced because data transfer is performed when the external processor is ready to receive data . Although a plurality of cards are shown in Fig. 19, an external processor may also interface with a single card or more than two cards.

[0215] As noted above, the card 100 may include an RFID, or a radio frequency identification receiver. 24 and 25, the card 100k includes an RFID receiver module or assembly 1350, which, in the exemplary embodiment shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, has the same depth or level as the card substrate 1352 Are positioned. The various layers of the card 100k adjacent to the substrate 1352 and the RFID receiver module 1350 may be similar to the layers shown, for example, in Figs. 7B or 8B. In contrast to FIG. 7B, the photo-detection layers 186a and 186b may be positioned, positioned, or deposited on both the substrate 1352 and the RFID receiver module 1350. An intermediate layer (not shown) may also be disposed or positioned between the RFID receiver module 1350 and the light detection layer 186a and between the RFID receiver module 1350 and the light detection layer 186b. Although the exemplary embodiment illustrates the RFID module or assembly 1350 as positioned side by side, adjacent, or co-planar with the substrate 1352, in other embodiments, May be disposed in or on substrate 1352 or other equivalent substrates.

[0216] The card 100k further includes at least one RFID antenna 1354 connected to the RFID receiver 1350. The RFID antenna 1354 is connected to the first main surface 101 of the card 100k and the second main surface 101d of the card 100k, Is positioned on or adjacent to the peripheral surface or edge 1356 of the card 100k, positioned between the surfaces 102. As shown in FIG. Edge 1356 may include cover structures or end portions of covers 174a and 174b, end portions of RFID receiver module 1350, and / or the peripheral surface of card substrate 1352. In the exemplary embodiment of Figures 24 and 25, the RFID antenna 1354 extends laterally beyond the peripheral surface 1356 parallel to the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102, RFID antenna 1354 can extend completely around edge 1356 (as shown in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 24), generally parallel to first main surface 101 and second major surface 102, And may be positioned elsewhere on the card 100k. For example, since the antenna 1354 is relatively thin, the antenna 1354 may extend across the first major surface 101 and / or the second major surface 102. The RFID antenna 1354 may be positioned at other available locations within the card 100k which may be located on the pixels or elements of the card 100k that may interfere with the ability of the antenna 1354 to receive RF energy But is limited only by the proximity to it.

[0217] Referring to Figs. 26 and 27, the card 100m includes an RFID receiver 1360 positioned on a card substrate 1362. Fig. Card 100m further includes a positioned RFID antenna 1364 as being on or within the first cover structure 1366a and the second cover structure 1366b. The card substrate 1362 may include one or more connector pins 1368 that are embedded within the card substrate 1362 and may be connected to the RFID receiver 1360 and the RFID antenna 1364 Extend perpendicularly to the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102 for connection to one another. The first cover structure 1366a and / or the second cover structure 1366b includes a connector receptacle 1370 that is electrically connected to the RFID antenna 1364 and configured to receive the connector pin 1368 . An RFID connecting line 1372 extends from the RFID receiver 1360 to each connector pin 1368. In order to read the RFID tag using the internal energy of the card 100m, the RFID receiver 1360 transmits the signal into the RFID connecting line 1372. The energy moves into the connector pin 1368 and then into the connector receptacle 1370. From the connector receptacle 1370, energy is transferred into the RFID antenna 1364, where RF energy is transmitted from the card 100m. The RF energy activates any nearby RFID tags, which then emit RF energy, which includes information about the item on which the RFID tag is placed, or about the location of the RFID tag. The amount of information provided by the RFID tag may be sufficient to provide a unique identification of the product on which the tag is placed or placed, including the packaging of the product. The energy transmitted by the RFID tag is received by the RFID antenna 1364, which is directed into the connector pin 1368, which is then directed into the connector receptacle 1370. The energy then travels along the RFID connecting line 1372 to the RFID receiver 1360 where the RFID receiver 1360 decodes the received energy and transmits the decoded information to the processor 110. [ Thereafter, the processor 110 uses the RFID information to provide information to the user of the card 100m. The operation of the RFID receiver module 1350 is similar to that of the RFID receiver 1360.

[0218] Although the operation of the RFID receiver 1360 and the RFID receiver module 1350 can utilize internal power to activate the near field communication RFID tag, the venue containing such tags also has a positioning Thereby enabling the RFID tags to continuously emit digital RF signals that the card 100m can receive. ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 > [0031] < / RTI > The benefit of such a system is that the Venue can use the information transmitted from the RFID tags for inventory, mapping, and other purposes, while the holder or user of the card 100m can use the power from the card 100m And to use the information to locate products, determine if an item is in stock, etc., while minimizing drain of use of card 100m to extend useful operating time of card 100m.

[0219] Although the present disclosure provides two embodiments of RFID receivers, namely RFID receiver 1360 and RFID receiver module 1350, the position of the RFID receivers may be located at any available location within the card form Lt; / RTI > For example, in another exemplary embodiment, the RFID receiver can be positioned between other layers of the card, e.g., between the light detection layer 186a and the magnetic-out layer 190a. Similarly, the position of the RFID antenna 1354 or the RFID antenna 1364 can be in other positions than those shown in Figures 24-27, which is limited only by the demands of the various layers in the card.

[0220] Including the RFID capability within the card 100 provides various advantages to the user of the card 100. For example, the card 100 may be an RFID interface with a legacy card reader or other non-RFID receiving devices. Considering the ability of the card to emulate swiping without movement, as described previously herein, the placement of a card with an RFID receiver can be achieved, for example, by a legacy card reader 1200 13). After inserting the card 100m into the legacy card reader 1200 an item with any RFID tag may be positioned within the read distance of the card 100m and the card 100m may send the RFID information to the legacy card reader 1200 To the magnetic information that can be read by the reader / writer. In another example, the card 100m may be positioned on the POS card reader 1300 (Fig. 14). As with the previous example, an item with an RFID tag can be positioned close to the card 100m, and the card 100m can convert information received from the RFID tag into a form readable by the POS card reader 1300 will be. Thus, card 100m, or any version of card 100 with an RFID receiver, may include two, including RFID, bar code, Qr code, magnetic read heads, audible or audio, Or a data-translator between the data storage devices of more than that type. In addition, since card 100 includes Wi Fi capability, card 100m may also include other devices, such as cell phones, tablets, computers, netbooks, and possibly smart displays, smart TVs, , And a low-cost interface with devices with Wi-Fi.

[0221] Fig. 28 shows a card 100n according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, including a plurality of RFID receivers 1380 shown in phantom lines. The benefit of the plurality of RFID receivers 1380 is that the card 100n can use a plurality of RFID receivers 1380 to track objects with the RFID tag, which is the position of such an object, , The velocity of the object, and, if present, the acceleration of the object, more precisely. In addition, like the card 100, the card 100n includes a tracking ability by visual analysis, and also has a tracking ability using sound emission and reception. In order to avoid variations of the card 100 and the user of the card 100n or to cause auditory pain to the people near the user of the card 100n, Lt; / RTI > The card 100n can also analyze the reflected sound and, as required, the card 100n can track objects in the field of view of the card 100n, And sufficient resolution for analysis, and with sufficient resolution, card 100n may even have the ability to perform shallow depth sonograms. Thus, card 100 and card 100n provide relatively simple and effective sensors that are easily adaptable to Wi Fi networks for ad hoc or permanent security systems. Also, given the ability of the card 100n, and other versions of the card 100, to identify speed, acceleration, and position using various sensors, the card 100n can also be used as a test instrument It also has the ability. Given the ability of the card 100n and other versions of the card 100 to correlate the inputs of the various sensors to each other, the card 100n may crosscheck the results, , Sound, and RFID information to improve the accuracy of speed, acceleration, and position calculations.

[0222] The ability to read RFID information presents many benefits to the card 100. Referring to Figures 29-31, an implementation of card 100 with RFID capability is described using the RFID localization system of vane 400. The vane 400 includes at least one inlet 402, a plurality of shelves, racks, end unit displays, coolers, freezers, aisle displays, etc. 404, Smart store stations 406, a plurality of checkout stations 408, and a plurality of Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 that provide RFID localization capabilities. The venue 400 includes a controller (not shown) that is wired or wirelessly connected to at least the smart store stations 406, the checkout stations 408, and the Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 do. The WiFi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 are positioned over the entire venue 400 and include RFID tags (not shown) positioned in shelves, racks, etc. 404 at all locations within the venue 400, Lt; / RTI > Although at least some of the Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 may include a Wi Fi transceiver, all Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 may include a Wi-Fi transceiver , Or Wi-Fi transceivers may be located separate from the RFID transmitters-receivers. The venue 400 further includes a plurality of items 412 positioned on one or more shelves, racks,

[0223] The venue system may include the location of all of the items 412 which may be manually entered into the store system but are preferably located on the items 412 or adjacent to the items 412 And is defined by a plurality of RFID tags. The Wi-Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 continue to receive data from the RFID tag associated with each item 412, so that the Venue system is able to determine the location of all items 412 in the venue 400 "Know". In some cases, an RFID tag may be placed on each individual item 412, but in other embodiments the RFID tag may be placed on or under the shelf to identify the product brand and type or general category of product, e.g., Peanut butter, certain brand serials, and certain types of brands because there are many brands of different types and categories, or different categories, considered appropriate by the management of the venue 400. The system of venue 400 acquires the location of each RFID tag by signals received by Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410, and Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 Within the venue 400 at a sufficient density to ensure that all RFID tags provided in the venue 400 receive sufficient power from Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 to operate. Position. And is received by at least three RFID transmitters-receivers to enable mapping of the locations of each RFID tag.

[0224] To find items in the venue 400, the user of the card 100 starts the venue interface module shown in FIG. 30 and generally indicated at 330. Bennie interface module 330 uses the features and capabilities of venue 400 in combination with the capabilities of card 100 to create an efficient interface with venue 400. The venue interface module 330 includes a shopping list module 332, a venue interface module 334, a mapping module 336, an item module 338, and a checkout module 340. The functions and processes of the venue interface module 330 may include portions of the venue 400 and portions of the card 100 such as the processor 110 of the card 100 and one or more sensors or pixel layers. have.

[0225] The vane interface module 330 is initiated by the need to go shopping. In the shopping list module 332, a shopping list is generated in the card 100. The shopping list may be entered into the memory 114 of the card 100 by the user or downloaded to the memory 114 of the card 100 from another device such as a mobile phone, laptop, or other device. Once the shopping list is created, a shopping list is provided to the venue interface module 334. In the venue interface module 334, the processor 110 of the card 100 receives the information provided by the venue 400, which may include location information, prices, coupons, special deals, rebates, It combines information. The shopping list and the venue information are provided to the mapping module 336 by the venue interface module 334. [ In the mapping module 336, the route for each item 412 on the list is determined. This determination may be made at the processor 110, or may be determined at the venue 400 processor (not shown) and then sent to the card 100. Once the route for each item 412 is determined, the vane interface module 330 continues to the item module 338 where each item 412 is located and added to the user's physical cart or container. Once all of the items 412 from the user's shopping list have been located, control is passed from the item module 338 to the checkout module 340. In the checkout module 340, the items selected by the user are verified, payment for the items 412 is made, and the user exits the venny 400.

[0226] 31, a user of the card 100 initiates a venue interface process 420 to discover items in the venue 400 and the venue interface process 420 may be used to provide an efficient interface with the venue 400, In combination with the capabilities of the card 100, including the processor 110, the memory 114, and one or more pixel layers, to create the veneer 400's characteristics and capabilities. This interface may be to obtain items 412, i.e., to shop, or it may be to browse only items 412. The Venue interface process 420 may be used to return other functions in the Venue 400, such as returning items 412, visiting the vending machine 400's service functions, such as visiting vending machines or food courts, , And other functions available to the user or public in the venue 400. [ The venue interface process 420 may include functions and features of the venue 400 and portions of the card 100 and may be distributed over one or more portions of the venue interface module 330 .

[0227] The Venue interface process 420 begins with a start process 422. The start process 422 may be a recognition that an item is needed. The process 420 moves control from the start process 422 to the list creation process 424, which is performed in the shopping list module 332. In the list creation process 424, the user creates a list of required and / or desired items. Such a list may be created by scanning items in the user's home, or may be manually entered by selecting from a list of suggestions, etc., by voice.

[0228] After creation of the list of needs and / or desires, the process 420 moves control from the list creation process 424 to the interface with the venue system process 426 as part of the venue interface module 334. At the interface with the vane system process 426, the user enters the inlet 402 and moves to the vane 400. Once in the venue 400, the features of the user's card 100, such as Wi Fi, communicate with the local area net provided by venue 400. Such communications can be wireless or through smart store stations 406. [ The smart store stations 406 provide a docking station that may have features similar to the card reader 1300 and may be used by the smart store stations 406 such as the light detection layer 186a or 186b, Input layer 192a or 192b, or the piezoelectric-input layer 194a or 194b.

[0229] Once interfaced with the smart store stations 406, the process 420 moves control from the interface with the venue system process 426 to the item mapping process 428 performed by the mapping module 336. The system of the venue 400 includes the location of each category of items, including each item 412, or 412, which is identified by the RFID tags associated with each item 412 described above herein . These positions are used in conjunction with the list of required or desired items 412 located on the card 100 to map the route, taking into account the position of the shelves, racks, and the like 404. This mapping is preferably performed in the system of the vane 400 because detailed information exists in the system of the vene 400. However, the processor of card 100, such as processor 110, may also generate such maps. Also, although data delivery from one smart store station 406 to one or more sensors or pixel layers of the card 100 is typically faster for the reasons described above herein, Because it includes features that can communicate with Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410, processor 110 of card 100 can also acquire new map information when needed. The route used to traverse from smart store stations 406 to each item 412 may be modified by user-selection options. For example, the user can select the fastest route, the shortest route, the minimum rush route, which can be defined by store experience, optical analysis, and other route modifications. If the user does not select any route modifications, the system of the vane 400 is configured to provide escapes to the user's route, which causes the user to move to the side of the featured products, Provide awareness and provide extended product exposures and sales to Venue. Once the map is created by the system of the venue 400, the map information is downloaded to the memory 114 or processor 110 of the card 100.

[0230] Once a map or other directions are provided to the memory 114 or processor 110 of the card 100, the process 420 may retrieve from the item mapping process 428 a list item selection process 430 that is part of the item module 338 ). In the list item selection process 430, considering the information provided by the item mapping process 428, the "first" item on the list of users represented by the map generated by the item mapping process 428 is selected do. Since the item mapping process 428 identifies the route based on a number of factors, including user preferences and modifications provided by the venue 400, the "first" It may be the item 412 farthest from the item 412 or it may be the closest item 412 or it may be between the closest item 412 and the farthest item 412. [

[0231] After selection of the item 412 from the list, the process 420 moves control from the list item selection process 430 to the veneus system process 432. Venue 400 can provide sales, coupons, generic products, discounts, alternatives, featured products, etc. for any particular item 412. This information may be provided to the processor 110 of the card 100 during the item mapping process 428 and may be accessed during the venue system process 432 or the processor 110 of the card 100 may access the Wi- Receivers 410 and receive information from the venue system via Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 when each item 412 is selected. From the information provided by the venue 400, the user can determine whether to select one of the presented options.

[0232] Once venue 400 has communicated the available options for a particular item 412 and the user determines whether any of the options presented is acceptable, To the item option determination process 434. In the item option determination process 434, the process 420 determines whether the user has selected any of the options presented in the venue system process 432. If the user can not find the desired option, or if the user decides not to purchase the item from the list, then control is passed from the item determination process 434 to the item delete process 436. In the item delete process 436, the current item from the list may be deleted, or may be deleted, based on options selected by the user during the item delete process 436 or before the item delete process 436, Or to a future list. From the item deletion process 436, control passes to the list completion determination process 448, discussed in more detail below. If the user has found the desired option, then control is passed from the item option determination 434 to the user guidance process 438.

[0233] In the user guidance process 438, the processor 110 of the card 100 provides the outputs to guide the user to the current item from the list of users stored in the memory 114 of the card 100, Output layers 196a or 196b from the display outputs from the light-emitting pixel layer 198. The display output from the light- These directions may be enhanced by the communication between the RF receivers of the card 100 and the Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410, in the location unit 144, for the item 412 being obtained This communication is used to determine the position of the card 100. The location unit 144 may use multiple sensors to determine the position or position of the card 100 for a particular item 412, depending on the capabilities of these sensors to function in the venue 400. For example, the GPS function of the location unit 144 of the card 100 may operate in the venue 400 and provide relatively accurate directions to the particular item 412. [ Since the venue 400 has a plurality of Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 arranged to ensure coverage throughout the venue 400, the position of the card 100 to provide precise directions Can be determined with sufficient accuracy for a particular item 412. [ Directives or commands for the user are displayed on the light emitting pixel layer 198a or 198b of the card 100 as a visual two-dimensional or three-dimensional map on the light emitting pixel layer 198a or 198b of the card 100 As directions arrows, directions or distances, or directions, as directions, e.g., left, right, front, rear, top and bottom (to provide a position on one or more vertically extending shelves) As shown in FIG. The directions may also be provided so that they can be heard through voice or pitches. Once the user has reached the proximity of a particular item 412, the card 100 may determine its own RFID capability, e.g., the RFID receiver 1360, the RFID receiver module 1350, The one provided by another RFID device can be used and this RFID tag provides the closest location for a particular item 412 that the system of the venue 400 can provide.

[0234] Once the user has reached the location of the particular item 412, control is passed from the user guide process 438 to the item collection process 440. In an item collection process 440, a user may physically move a particular item 412 from a venue location, such as shelves, racks, etc. 404, to a user's physical cart, basket, arms, hands, . When the user moves a particular item 412 from the venue location to a user's carrier device or location, the user may scan the card 100 with a bar code or Qr code on the item, The item detailing process 442 moves control to the item detailing process 442 which, together with the total amount and annotations of the selected items, allows the user to maintain a perception of the total amount expected at the checkout, Such as a brief description and potential coupons, specials, availability of extended warranties, etc., to the memory 114 of the card 100 or to the running checkout list . Once item detailing process 442 is complete, control passes from item detailing process 442 to item checkoff process 444.

[0235] The selected item 412 is marked as purchased or deleted from the list of items for purchase stored in the memory 114 or the processor 110 of the card 100 in the item checkoff process 444. [ Control then moves from the item checkoff process 444 to the browse entry mode decision process 446. [ When the user selects each item from the list stored in the card 100, it may decide to ask for an item that is not in the user list, and thus wants to enter the browse mode. In the browse mode, the user can enter a new item 412 to be called while keeping the list stored in the card 100 undefined. The venue interface process 420 continues to remain in browse mode until the user chooses to exit browse mode, or until the user stops the venue interface process 420 (which the user may at any time).

[0236] Once the user decides to leave the browse mode, control passes from the browse mode entry decision process 446 to the list completion decision process 448. In the list completion decision process 448, the venue interface process 420 determines whether the last item on the list has been reached by referring to the list stored in the memory 114 or the processor 110 of the card 100 . If the last item on the list has not been reached, control passes from the list completion decision process 448 to the list item selection process 430, and the venue interface process 420 continues as described above herein. When the last item on the list stored in the card 100 is reached, control passes from the list completion decision process 448 to the user exit guidance process 450.

[0237] In the user exit guidance process 450 located at the checkout module 340, the venue interface process 420 uses the information provided by the system of the venue interface process 420 to check the user of the venue 400 Out stations 408. [0051] Typically, these directions will be the shortest route from the user's current location to the checkout stations 408, although the directions may select different routes depending on the conditions of the venue 400 or user preferences.

[0238] Once in the area of checkout stations 408, control is passed from exit guidance process 450 to checkout process 452. In the checkout process 452, the systems or persons of the venue 400 verify that the items collected or gathered by the user are matched to the list stored by the card 100. This verification can be done by scanning the RFID tags of the items carried by the user, by scanning bar codes or Qr codes, or by other verification methods. Items gathered or collected by the user and presented at the checkout stations 408 may be transmitted from the RF or Wi Fi output, optical output from the light emitting pixel layer 198a or 198b, or from the pixel layers of the card 100 The checkout process 452 is completed and control is transferred from the checkout process 452 to the payment process 454 if the match is matched to the list provided by the outputs of the card 100, Where the user of the card 100 selects a payment method that may be stored in one or more credit cards or in the memory 114 of the card 100 and may be stored in another Payment channels. After the payment is provided to the Venue 400, control is passed from the payment process 454 to the termination process 456.

[0239] Although not specifically shown, the vane 400 includes a security system that includes a security zone 414 that detects the position of the RFID tags as RFID tags move from the interior of the vane 400 to the exterior of the vane 400 can do. Since these security systems typically only detect the presence of an RFID tag, they need to be removed or the data needs to be scrambled or removed in order to prevent the activation of the security system. The system 1 of the present disclosure provides a configuration that eliminates the need to remove or deactivate RFID tags. Since the card 100 has already provided a list and payment for all items in proximity to the user of the card 100, the transmissions by the card 100 can be used for all authorized items close to the user of the card 100 Provide exit passage. For example, if a user has a first item 412, a second item 412, a third item 412 and a fourth item 412 and the user moves into the range of the security zone 414, Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 detect the presence of a first item 412, a second item 412, a third item 412 and a fourth item 412. The system of the vane 400 communicates with the card 100 via a plurality of Wi Fi / RFID transmitters-receivers 410 and is informed that the user's card 100 has already paid for the four items, The system of the venue 400 ignores the presence of the RFID tags on any authorized item 412 and reduces the effort on the venue 400. In addition to verifying that a particular card 100 has paid for the items, the system of the venue 400 may also verify the time and date of the transaction so that the user attempting to return to the store after leaving the store may In an attempt to exploit transactions for theft, the same four items can not be loaded into the cart. For example, if such an attempt is made, such as a departure from the venny 400, and then a return to collect four additional identical products, the security system of the venny 400 may be arranged such that the user has been in the shop twice, Customer's additional checking is required to verify that the user has only authorized products, with or without the user-purchased items 412 and / or returned to the vane 400 will be. Video evidence may be required to verify the user's two attempts to deceive the system of the venue 400 but the presence and absence of the time stamped exit from the venue 400 of the card 100 It is easier to know when these checks are required.

[0240] In the termination process 456 the user is informed that the features of the card 100, the venue interface module 330 and the venue interface process 420 are extended to the lowest cost options, available coupons, transactions, rebates, Leaving the Venue 400 with a firm perception that it has provided the user with a written warranty. In addition, the venue 400 and card 100 detail information about transactions that can be used to assist in returning items, using a certificate, and other purposes. Because of the information that may be collected by the venue 400, any information about the recall may also be sent to the user, even if the user does not complete the certificate card information for the manufacturer, supplier or venue 400.

[0241] 32 illustrates an RFID layer 470 in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. RFID layer 470 may be positioned adjacent to a substrate of card 100, such as substrate 170 or 370, as shown in Figure 8B. The RFID layer 470 includes a two-dimensional array of RFID antennas, and the two-dimensional array may all be the same in the exemplary embodiment, or may be optimized for a plurality of frequencies in other exemplary embodiments. The RFID layer 470 of FIG. 32 includes a plurality of RFID antennas 472, 474, and 476. The advantage of having a plurality of RFID antennas is that they are very small, providing the advantage that the RFID antenna array can collect more RF energy. In addition, the card 100 enables relatively accurate tracking of the RFID tag in the three-dimensional space, including tracking of the movement speed, acceleration and direction of the RFID tag. In addition, the card 100 may include a plurality of tuning circuits, the RFID antennas 472 may be connected to a first tuning circuit (not shown), the RFID antennas 474 to a second tuning circuit (not shown) By connecting antennas 476 to a third tuning circuit (not shown) and optimizing the coupling of each of the RFID antennas and tuning circuits to a particular RFID frequency that is different than the other combinations of RFID antennas and tuning circuits, 100 achieves or provides improved locating capabilities in environments with high density RFID tags. As an alternative to the plurality of tuning circuits, the card 100 may include a tuning circuit having the ability to modify the tuning to a plurality of RF frequencies associated with the RFID tags. The card 100 including the RFID layer 470 may be used in a venue that includes RFID tags configured to provide a plurality of RF frequencies, such as a vane 480 that is part of what is shown in Fig.

[0242] One challenge in attempting to discover a particular item 412 in a Venue having hundreds or thousands of RFID tags is to identify a particular RFID tag. To reduce the amount of data being received by the card 100 attempting to discover a particular RFID tag, the system may utilize a plurality of RFID wavelengths that assist in finding a particular item. In addition, when a smart RFID tag is used, only the particular item being sought can provide the transmit signal. 33, the vane 480 includes a plurality of items 412 that are positioned at various locations of the vane 480, such as a shelf, rack, and the like (404). do. Each item 412 is associated with an RFID tag 482 that includes the ability to transmit at two or more frequencies. In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 33, the RFID tag 482 is configured to transmit three frequencies. The RFID tag 482 includes a first transmitting circuit 484 configured to generate a first frequency, a second transmitting circuit 486 configured to generate a second frequency, and a third transmitting circuit 486 configured to generate a third frequency, And each of the frequencies is matched to one of the frequencies of the first tuning circuit, the second tuning circuit, and the third tuning circuit.

[0243] When the user of the card 100 enters the passage 490 of the vane 480, the system of the vane 480 is connected to the first frequency transmitted by the first transmission circuit 484, the second transmission circuit 486 By transmitting a second frequency transmitted by the third transmission circuit 488 or an RF frequency matching the third frequency transmitted by the third transmission circuit 488. [ However, other users attempting to discover a particular item with the RFID tag 482 are also simultaneously transmitting in the pass 490 a number of RFID tags 482, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 412 < / RTI > In order to accelerate the process of finding a particular item 412, the system of the vane 480 may send a specific frequency for a particular customer in a restricted area to help localize the search for the card 100 user have. The vane 480 includes a plurality of RF transmitters 492 and the plurality of RF transmitters 492 may have the ability to transmit at a plurality of frequencies or may have a first frequency 484, (486) or the third frequency (488), respectively. The nearest RF transmitter 492 may transmit at the first frequency when the card 100 looking for an item 494 having a particular item, e.g., an RFID tag 482, enters the passageway 490. When the user of the second card 100 looking for the item 496 enters the passage 490, the nearest available RF transmitter 492 may transmit at the second frequency. Similarly, when a user of a third card 100 looking for an item 498 enters a passageway 490, the nearest available RF transmitter 492 transmits at a third frequency. In each case, the card 100 is advised by the system of the vane 480 at the particular frequency that the item of the user is transmitting, which may require the card 100 to review it before localizing the particular item Minimize the amount of data.

[0244] The veneer 480 also includes a plurality of RF transmitters 492 and RF transmitters 492 that allow only certain tags to be transmitted to the RF transmitters 492, RTI ID = 0.0 > RFID < / RTI > If the card 100 receives only limited information from only those RFID tags that are actively pursued rather than overflowed by signals from all the RFID tags within the coverage of the card 100, It becomes relatively fast.

[0245] RFID has been embraced in part because of the idea that very cheap RFID tags can be manufactured that have no local power and very few components. Thus, the RFID tags can be configured to provide sufficient charge power to "boot" or charge the RFID tag or device, with enough residual power to allow the RFID transmission device tuned to the same frequency to allow initial handshake communication, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > RFID < / RTI > Additional communication between the RFID tag and the RFID transmitter is possible if RF energy is continuously received by the RFID tag or device because the RFID transmitter remains in close proximity. Using more than one RFID frequency allows the RFID transmitter or the transmitting device to first use the lowest frequency, acquire a handshake, start a "talk" and then identify the identity of the tag, Information layers), it may be strategically used to raise the frequency of each successive RFID circuit in the tag. An RFID transmitter or a transmitting device can talk to more than one unique tag at the same time. The tag class narrows the choice to move to the next frequency layer and establish another connection and then talk to the RFIDs sought after the class communicating on that channel. The purpose of this layering is actually two purposes. One purpose is to quickly remove other nearby tags and the other purpose is to allow the RFID transmitter to fire the next higher frequency RFID frequency of the RFID tag in order for the tag to activate each different higher frequency RFID channel It is a physical fact that you must move closer and closer to an object. The need to be closer in the case of higher frequencies is due to the natural loss associated with radio frequency transmissions and the characteristics of higher frequency transmission lines. The higher the frequency, the greater the loss. Thus, in order to launch increasingly high frequency RFID tag layers, the RFID transmitter or the transmitting device must move physically closer if it stays at a fixed transmit output power level. The first lower frequency RFID tag channel is farther from the point of view of range and the RFID antenna array of card 100 provides solid direction information but is not sufficient to direct the card to touch an individual item. Because the first connection can lead to about six feet, the next RFID layer fires and guides the user to two feet, and finally when the next layer actually touches the item 412 being pursued to the card 100 So as to allow the card 100 to be displayed. This domino effect strategically exploits the known loss phenomenon of transmit power associated with increasingly higher frequencies. This may also be achieved by strategically limiting the number of RFID tags that fire in a given zone, providing an initial direction and providing a unique object or item that is sought by guiding the user closer to the unique RFID tag associated with the sought- 412) to be closer to the user. The key to this process is to acquire directional information that, based on the proximity, aligns the card 100 through which RFID tags can fire and actually fire and makes the item 412 being pursued closer to the user Which limits the total number of tags that communicate because the energy from the card 100 continuously fires higher frequency channels and the sink process and communications that allow alignment are performed by the card 100, In fact, if a software filter uses the information stored in each RFID tag to know the exact identity of the object being sought, in effect, the filter will filter all of the unwanted ≪ / RTI > and to fire the next channel so that less than 1 second for each layer, This allows the card 100 or other device capable of such multi-channel RFID communication to literally walk to the object by the user so that the user can move to the desired object < RTI ID = 0.0 > Directly to save time and energy of the user, and to allow the process to be a beneficial experience.

[0246] Having the RFID capability enables other features of the card 100. For example, an extremely small RFID tag, available in sizes close to those seen by a microscope, may be attached to a finger, nail, clothing, personal item of the card 100 user, e.g., glasses, pen, In order for the card 100 to function properly, a user with an RFID tag needs to be close to the card 100. The card 100 also combines its other biometric capabilities, e.g., image recognition, acoustic reception, etc., to verify that the user is alive and to confirm that the user is authorized to access the card 100 The RFID tag can be cross-checked against other characteristics of the user. In an exemplary embodiment, a user may have an extremely small RFID tag positioned on each finger, and each finger may be individually recognized as it accesses the functions and features of the card 100, 100) usage and to improve the ability to ensure that only authorized users have access to the card 100. [ In addition, the card 100 can track each individual RFID tag on each finger and use the proximity of the RFID tag separately or in conjunction with other information, e.g., visual analysis, Function or other related embodiments of the card 100 when it should be operated.

[0247] Previous embodiments of the present disclosure focus on credit card form factors. However, the fired nature of the card 100 is advantageously expandable to other form factors and devices. For example, FIGS. 34 and 35 illustrate a mat 500 that includes the layer and pixel features described previously herein. By using and combining multiple mats 500 in that the mat 500 can be of a size that allows virtually emulating any control panel or configuration, the mat 500 has a unique ability to provide. The mat 500 may be pre-programmed with various control configurations or panels, or the control panels and configurations may be uploaded via a wireless connection or Wi Fi. Control panel configurations that are fully visually represented include one or more of guarded toggle switches 502, pushbutton switches 504, keyboard (s) 506, slide controls 508, rocker switches 510, Dials 512, labels 514, and the like.

[0248] Once a particular control panel configuration is displayed on the mat 500, virtual or displayed controls may be activated using fingers or other body parts, e.g., a hand. Since the mat 500 includes a visual cognitive ability that can be housed in a process similar to the processor 110, the contact with the mat 500 can be completely non-contact. Finger movement toward the guarded toggle switch 502 and the next lateral motion are interpreted as moving the guarded toggle switch 502 to the open position. Then, the toggle (not shown) under the guard portion of the guarded toggle switch 502 can be operated with similar movement. Other switches may also be actuated by placing fingers or hands close to the switch and moving fingers or hands in such a way as to cause operation of the physical switch. Since the mat 500 includes audio output capability, each switch movement can be accomplished by sound indicative of the motion of the associated switch. In addition, false positives can be reduced and even eliminated by using smart analysis that requires a finger or hand gesture with a particular portion or amount overlapping the switch or control to reduce activation of the adjacent switch. Also, because the image recognition software recognizes the gestures, the orientation of the fingers suitable for moving a particular switch or control type, e.g., dial 512, can be perceived as only for movement of the dial controls, The dial 512 can only be moved by a recognized finger position or gesture suitable for movement of the dial 512.

[0249] In some instances where the mat 500 is powered by a mat similar to the mat 500, while there may be multiple virtual controls displayed, there may be values with real or physical controls. Referring to FIG. 36, an overlay 750 and smart mat 752 are shown. The smart mat 750 including a plurality of sensor layers such as the layers described for the card 100 and the mat 500 may be coupled to the overlay 750 via the recess 754 formed in the overlay 750. [ . The overlay 750 may include features that allow the mat 752 to be held in the recess 754, such as permanent magnets or retaining features (not shown). The overlay 750 includes a plurality of physical features such as a plurality of push buttons 756, a plurality of rocker switches 758, rotary dials 760, slide controls 762, Rotary switches 764, push buttons 766, and a display 768. [ The overlay 750 may also include a tag 770 with a unique identifier, such as a bar code, Qr tag, or some other identifier. The tag 770 is positioned in the recess 754 so that the mat 752 can "see" or read the tag 770 when the overlay 750 is positioned on the mat 752. [ ). ≪ / RTI >

[0250] The overlay 750 is designed to be completely unpowered or electrically inert. The user or operator combines the overlay 750 with the mat 752. The mat 752 visually "reads" the tag 770 such that the type of overlay 750, what can be individually programmed into the mat 752, or the tag 770 To the mat 752, which mat 752 is downloadable when prompted by the proximity of the mat 752. When an operator or user moves any control or switch on the overlay 750, the mat 752 may be moved to the position of the button, Switches, dials, and the like. The mat 752 also does not include any operational lights or displays. A display such as display 768 is substantially a transparent portion of overlay 750 that allows the display on mat 752 to be viewed in a direction perpendicular to overlay 750. The mat 752 is controlled to function as an actual device having controls of the overlay 750, such as an oscilloscope, radio, or other piece of equipment, Each movement causes the mat 752 to adjust the display output of the mat 752 so that the operator or user of the overlay 750 can confirm the effect of adjusting the dials 760. [ In an exemplary embodiment, one dial 760 may control the synchronization of the signal represented by mat 752 via "display" 768, and the user or operator may make any adjustment to the reality If so, the effect of moving the dial 760 on the display 768 can be confirmed. Additionally, various controls on the overlay 750 may be backlit or backlighted by the display functions of the mat 752, allowing various controls to be written as if those controls were in an actual application. In addition to backlighting, the light effects from the mat 752 may indicate the movement of the controls, e.g., in the case of a volume setting that includes 0 to 10, the levels of the knobs may be dark red To very bright red. By a simple touch, it is possible to obtain optical flash feedback, whereby the user is informed that, apart from other feedback, the system has registered the user's touch on such a key. Sound feedback is also possible from the mat 752.

[0251] It is less costly to train the equipment because the mat 752 can be coupled to a plurality of overlays, such as the overlay 750, because a plurality of such overlays can be placed on a single mat 752 Or " powered " In some situations, the mat 752 may be larger than the overlay. In such an environment, portions of the mat 752 that are not under the overlay may be powered off, displaying black, or displaying a design or border. In an exemplary embodiment, the exposed border of the mat 752 may function as a calculator, a note-taking device, or may allow control over the training scenarios of the mat 752 using an overlay at the interface . The mat 752 may also be smaller than the overlay, in which case two or more mats 752 may be similar to the configuration described below with respect to the embodiment of Figures 42-44, And may be used to interface with the overlay 750 through the adaptive capabilities of the mat 752, to match the parts of the output display to needs. That is, the two mats 752 will share positioned and sized outputs in a suitable manner for interfacing with the overlay 750. Any areas that are not required to interface with the overlay 750 may be darkened or inactivated or may provide space for notes or other functions or may be decorative or entertaining, Lt; / RTI > graphics.

[0252] The bottom surface of the overlay 750 in the recess 754 can be completely covered with a non-repeatable pattern outside the area of the tag 770, The movement can be transmitted, even if it is a slight movement. Once the overlay 750 has been removed, the software in the mat 752 may maintain a virtual image of the overlay 750 and ask the user if he or she wants to keep such a workable image and its associated program have. If the user continues to execute the mat 752, the user still has the same controls displayed on the mat 752 without the overlay 750. The display of controls may be reduced and tiled. In addition, if the overlay 750 is much smaller than the mat 752, then the portion of the mat 752 associated with the overlay 750 automatically has a size that fits itself to the borders of the overlay 750 And portions of the mat 752 outside the borders of the overlay 750 remain unlit or provide a decorative border or display. In some cases, a single mat 752 may hold two or more overlays 750 if space is allowed. The user may also place a plurality of overlays on the mat 752, one at a time. The functions of each overlay 750 may be maintained in the mat 752 to keep the images and features active and to tile them.

[0253] Additionally, since the cost of overlay 750 may be relatively less expensive, if overlay is frequently used, mat 752 may be left permanently in place and the overlay 750 may be worn , Or in the case of scrap or for other reasons, the new replacement is relatively easy to replace and often allows the user to "immediately replace" the overlays without technical assistance, And the mat 752 are fully automatic.

[0254] It should be apparent that the sensor capabilities of the mat 752, which are the ability to measure or read the speed of actuation of the controls, provide the enhanced capabilities to the overlays 750. In some situations, if the overlay 750 is for a muscle appliance or game control, the speed of movement can be transferred to the intensity of the actuation.

[0255] Owing to the visual capabilities of the card 100 and, more specifically, because of the visual capabilities of the pixel configurations described herein above, other functions and features become possible. One of these functions and features is the ability to recognize both different types of gestures, both dynamic and static. In addition to extending credit card type capabilities, as embodied in the various cards 100 previously described herein, the ability to recognize both static and dynamic gestures leads to a novel and unique mechanism. In one exemplary embodiment, the card 100 or mat 500 may be used to enable actuation of a virtual switch, such as, for example, rocker switches 510, slide controls 508, RFID tags may be required to be positioned on the hand or on each individual finger. The card 100 or the mat 500 may also be used to access the personal features using the card 100 or the mat 500 via RFID, fingerprints, key Kirlian, or other types of recognition Track the identity of someone, and document such use for security purposes, for training purposes, for document access, and so on.

[0256] With reference to Figs. 37-41, an exemplary embodiment of a card 100 including static gestures according to the present disclosure is described. When the user holds the card 100 in the hand 530 including the fingers 532 (note that in this case, the thumb is considered a finger) May be intended to perform certain functions using the card 100, such as using it as a telephone, camera, or RFID locator. The user of the card 100 is able to identify specific grasps of the card 100, which may be described as a static gesture, through unique user identification and biometric authentication, To the particular functions and configurations of the mobile terminal 100. Alternatively, the user of card 100 may use the default gestures that are the best or ideal gestures for a particular function, which may be shared by the various users of card 100, And may be downloaded to the card 100. [

[0257] It is noted that the card 100 has other functions and capabilities, and the presented examples are merely representative samples of the relationship between the manner in which the card 100 is maintained and the associated functions of the card 100 . Since the card 100 includes the ability to "see" by light detecting the pixel elements 148 and because the card 100 is configured to analyze the images, Is configured to recognize whether the card 100 is held by the arrangement of the hand 530 and the fingers 532 associated with a particular function of the card 100. [ In an exemplary embodiment, the edge or side 105 of the card 100 may include pixel layers to improve the ability to recognize graps and static gestures. As in previous embodiments, arrays, graps, or static gestures may be used to recognize a user of the card 100 and / or assist in recognizing arrays, graps, or static gestures , It may be combined with biometrics captured by one or more layers of the card 100. The card 100 may also better understand the various graps or static gestures because of the sensors positioned below the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102. [

[0258] 37, the hand 530 and the fingers 532 may be used as a static gesture 534, a grab, or an array, which may be associated with the use of the card 100 as a telephone 100). Once the card 100 recognizes the grab or static gesture 534, the card 100 configures itself to function as a telephone. To reduce the perceived failure, the card 100 may include a time delay so that the user can advance the card 100 in advance (e.g., before the card 100 recognizes the grab or static gesture 534) It is necessary to keep it for a fixed period.

[0259] 38, the hand 530 and the fingers 532 may be used as a static gesture 536, a grab, or an array, which may be associated with use of the card 100 as a camera. In the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 38, 100). Once the card 100 recognizes an arrangement, grab, or static gesture 536, the card 100 configures itself to be a telephone.

[0260] 39, the hand 530 and the fingers 532 may be used as a static gesture 538, a grab, or an array, which may be associated with the use of the card 100 as an RFID scanner. In this example, (100). Once the card 100 recognizes an arrangement, grab, or static gesture 538, the card 100 configures itself to function as an RFID scanner.

[0261] Of course, the embodiments of Figs. 37-39 are only a small fraction of the possible functions that can be accessed by a particular grab or static gesture. For example, positioning the card 100 in a first direction at a particular angle with a particular grab may represent a texting function. Positioning the card 100 in a second direction, perpendicular to the first direction, at a particular angle with a particular grab may represent an e-mail function. As with the static gesture 536, holding the card 100 in a specific orientation, pointing to a finger of the opposite hand, or speaking a voice command can specify that the picture is taken. Card 100 will provide the option to save or delete the video clip if the acquired image or video option is selected. The user of the card 100 always has the option of selecting whether the card 100 will automatically recognize the gestures. Card 100 includes an array of filters or discriminators to reduce the likelihood of automatic selection of an unwanted mode, but a real number can still occur, and therefore a static gesture mode may be selected Having the ability to deselect mode is an advantageous feature.

[0262] Allowing a user of the card 100 to define such arrangements provides advantages to the user, although various arrangements, graps, or static gestures can be predefined. For example, portions of the hand or those whose use of a particular finger is restricted or unusable may need to define alternative grab or static gesture configurations. In addition, individuals using prosthetics may need to define unique static gestures appropriate to the configuration of the prosthesis. Additionally, some individuals use alternative body parts, as alternatives to the hand, including the inside of the elbows of the arms, feet and toes, mouth, and the like. The ability to adapt the functions of the card to any a definable or recognizable configuration or arrangement of body parts, biological aids, or mechanical aids, which may include service animals, Providing to the card 100 provides unique capabilities.

[0263] Referring to FIG. 40, a gesture module is shown and generally designated 540. Gesture module 540 may be used to determine the orientation of card 100 in one or more objects such as fingers or other body parts, mechanical actuators, biological actuators, Used in conjunction with cognition. At least a portion of the gesture module 540 is located, for example, in one or more of the pixel layers of the card 100 and the processor 110. The gesture module includes an orientation module 542, a grap analysis module 544, and a card mode module 546.

[0264] Gesture module 540 may be initiated within processor 110 of card 100 as part of a series of standard operating modules. Once initiated, the orientation module 542 determines if the card 100 is maintained in an orientation that matches a predetermined orientation that may be associated with a predefined card mode or function. If the card 100 is maintained in an orientation that can be associated with a predefined function or mode of the card 100, information related to the orientation is provided to the grap analysis module 544. [ In the grab analysis module 544, one or more sensor inputs may indicate whether the array, grab, or static gesture corresponds to a predetermined array, grab, or static gesture, and whether the array, grab, And the orientation of the card 100 corresponds to the function or mode stored in the processor 110 and / or the memory 114 of the card 100. [ The sensor inputs detected by the grab analysis module 544 include the photodetection pixel elements 148 of the photodetection layers 186a and 186b of Figure 7b and are sensitive to the touch, -in < / RTI > layers 194a and 194b. The grab analysis module 544 determines whether the particular orientations of the fingers 532 and the hand 530 correspond to the input from the light detection layers 186a and 186b as well as other inputs . Such an orientation may be used to determine where the fingers 532 contact the card 100 or to a finger 532 or pointing finger 532 that has been elevated to a particular angle relative to other fingers or hand 530, Or more of the fingers 532. 37, at least three fingers are aligned next to the first major side 101 or the second major side 102 of the card 100, One finger is positioned longitudinally on the opposite side of the card 100 but is also positioned on the same main surface or side 101 or 102, . The grap analysis module 544 located in one or more of the processors of the card 100, such as the processor 110, may be configured to receive the optical detection layers 186a and / or < RTI ID = 0.0 & 186b that the orientation of the fingers 532 along either side of the card 100 indicates that the grap analysis module 544 is a grab that equates to the phone mode. If the combination of card orientation and grab is matched with a predefined combination of card orientation and grab, then such information is provided to the card mode module 546, which may include a camera function, an RFID tag read function, a phone function, And changes the function or mode of the card 100 to match the same predetermined mode or function.

[0265] Referring to FIG. 41, an exemplary (non-limiting) example of the present disclosure, which may reside in one or more of the gesture modules 540 and may be included in the processor of the card 100, A gesture process according to an embodiment is shown and is generally denoted as 550. [ It should be noted that the gesture process 550 may be a subroutine of a larger process, which may also apply to other processes described in this disclosure. As such, the gesture process 550 may be regularly "polled" or checked to confirm that the process 550 needs to be performed. Once the gesture process 550 is complete or terminated, control may be returned to the original process or call that gave control to the gesture process 550.

[0266] The gesture process 550 begins with a start process 552. The start process 552 may include other functions related to initializing variables, clearing registers, and preparing for performing various processes of the gesture process 550, Or at other portions of the processor 110. [ When the start process 552 is completed, control passes from the start process 552 to the fixed orientation decision process 554.

[0267] In a fixed orientation determination process 554 that is part of the orientation module 542, the gesture process 550 analyzes inputs from one or more pixel layers to determine whether the card 100 is in a fixed orientation. In the context of this embodiment of the present disclosure, the fixed orientation may be a grasp, a static gesture, or a combination of body parts (e.g., parts, prosthetics, and biological aids. If the condition of the fixed orientation determination process 554 is not met, the gesture process 550 may loop through the fixed orientation determination process 554 until such conditions are met. If, however, the condition of the fixed orientation determination process 554 is not met, then control is more likely to return to a calling program or subroutine (not shown), and the calling program or subroutine is not a gesture process 550 Will effectively terminate the gesture process 550 until a later call is made.

[0268] If the processor 110 determines that the user of the card 100 is holding the card 100 in a fixed orientation by analysis of the sensor data, then control is transferred from the fixed orientation determination process 554, at least in part, And proceeds to a grab analysis process 556 positioned in the analysis module 544. In the grab analysis process 556, the configuration of the elements that hold the card 100, e.g., the hand 530 and the fingers 532, are analyzed at the processor 110. For example, the photodetection pixel elements 148 of one or more pixel layers, such as the photodetection layers 186a and 186b, receive information about the orientations and positions of the fingers 532 and the hand 530. The data used to analyze the configuration of the elements that hold the card 100 may be data from the light detection pixel elements 148 but other pixels may be used to control the elements that hold the card 100, May be used to detect the pixels 109 and the magnetic-input pixels 150, the piezoelectric-output pixels 113, and / or the piezo-input pixels 111. The gain using a plurality of pixels is to extend the definition of a static gesture or grab, including the ability to detect an array of elements other than the hands 530 and the fingers 532. For example, the card 100 may be maintained by a kinematic arrangement of ferromagnetic rods that may be detectable through invisible pixels, such as the magnetic-input pixel elements 150, Can be positioned in a covering that is visually opaque but also permeable to magnetic energy. As noted above, a plurality of sensing pixels positioned as part of the card 100 extend the ability to detect non-biological static gestures or graps.

[0269] The analysis of the elements holding the card 100, e.g., the hand 530 and the fingers 532, may include the amount of overlap of the card 100 and the positions of the finger tips. Additionally, the grab analysis process 556 may include positioning the hand 530 along the extent of the features, such as the edge of the card 100, and the positioned finger 530 along the same edge, Three fingers that partially overlap the card 100 may be matched with a predetermined or user-defined set of features stored in the processor 110 of the memory 114 or card 100, for example. The grab analysis process 556 will attempt to match as many sensor inputs as possible to the memory 114, processor or controller 110 or other stored grab configurations.

[0270] When the grab analysis process 556 is complete, control proceeds from the grab analysis process 556 to the grab composition determination process 558. [ In the grab configuration determination process 558, the processor 110 determines whether an array, grab, or static gesture is defined or associated with the card 100 functionality. As part of the grap analysis process 556, the processor 110 determines whether the arrangement, the grab or the static gesture of the fingers conforms to the grab that corresponds to the telephone mode of the card 100, RTI ID = 0.0 > 556 < / RTI > If the arrangement, grab or static gesture detected by card 100 is not associated with card 100 functionality or is not defined as card 100 functionality, then control is made to fixed culture determination process 554, Lt; / RTI > Control may also, in another embodiment, proceed from the grab configuration determination process 558 to a call or control program or subroutine. If an arrangement, grab, or static gesture is associated with the card 100 functionality, control proceeds from the grab configuration determination process 558 to the mode change process 560.

[0271] In the mode change process 560 located at least partially in the card mode module 546, the operational configuration of the card 100 is changed to conform to the functionality identified in the grab analysis process 556. [ As described above, such modes or functions may be applied to the processor 110 of the card 100, such as a camera mode or function, a phone mode or function, an RFID scanning mode or function, a voice scanning or sonogram mode or function, Other modes may be programmed. If the card 100 is functioning in the mode defined by the grab analysis process 556, control proceeds from the mode change process 560 to the user termination process 562. [

[0272] In the user termination process 562, the processor 110 determines whether the user requires finishing or terminating the current mode or function, or whether the user requires changing to a different mode or function. Such requests may be represented by a user by changing a static gesture or grab for the card 100, or by directly accessing the virtual controls for the card 100. If the user requests to end the current mode or function, control proceeds from the user termination process 562 to the card usage complete determination process 566, which is described in more detail below. If the user requests to continue using the card 100, control proceeds from the user termination process 562 to the grab holding decision process 564.

[0273] In the grab holding decision process 564, the processor 110 determines whether the static gesture used to hold the card 100, the grab for the card 100, or the card 100 is being held . If the arrangement, grab, or static gesture is being maintained by the user, then control continues until the user disengages or changes the arrangement, grab, or static gesture- The process proceeds to the card use completion process 566, and a loop is established through the grab holding decision process 564. [

[0274] In the card usage complete process 566, the processor 110 determines whether the user has finished using the card 100. [ Such a determination may be made by a change in arrangement, grab, or static gesture, or may be made when the user accesses the virtual controls for the card 100. If the user continues to use the card 100, control proceeds from the card usage complete process 566 to the fixed orientation determination process 554. As with the other processes described above, in another embodiment, control may proceed from the card usage complete process 566 to a calling program or subroutine that returns to the gesture process 550 later. If the user of the card 100 has finished using the card 100, then control proceeds from the card usage complete process 566 to the end process 568 where the card 100 is dormant dormant, sleep, or shutdown modes, thereby terminating the gesture process 550. [0050]

[0275] The discussion of static gestures focuses on the card 100, but the mat 500 also operates based on visual recognition or analysis. As the fingers move to activate the displayed feature on the mat 500, the mat 500 may be subjected to a visual analysis of the finger from inputs received from the light detection pixel elements 148 by a processor similar to the processor 110 Which is effectively a gesture, and based on the amount of time or time for the station, the finger is held in a specific position prior to recognition by the mat 500, and such gesture may be a static gesture . While this description illustrates fingers, the mat 500 may also be trained to recognize other objects such as a stylus, pencil or pen, piece of wood, metal rod, etc., as an actuating device. The types or types of objects that the mat 500 can be trained to recognize are not limited for all practical purposes. Conversely, when the mat 500 is trained to recognize, for example, a pencil as an object of operation, using sensing capabilities capable of detecting shape, distance, etc., any object that does not meet the color and shape of the pencil is recognized And the mat 500 will be unresponsive. By training the mat 500 to recognize a particular object as an operating object, it is possible to provide considerable safety to the operation of the mat 500 to determine whether there is a bamboo chopstick stored in a particular object, It makes it hard for the three to know.

[0276] The display capabilities and sensor of the card 100 provide the capability to convert a plurality of cards 100 into a high-resolution ad hoc display. Referring to Figures 42-44, an ad hoc matrix display according to an illustrative embodiment of the present disclosure is shown and generally indicated at 580. [ In an exemplary embodiment, the matrix display 580 includes a plurality of cards 100 identified as 100p, lOOq, lOOr, 100s, lOOt, lOOu, lOOv, lOOw, and lOOx. It should be apparent from the present disclosure that an ad hoc matrix display of almost any size is possible, and such ad hoc matrix display is limited only by the processing power and memory of the cards 100.

[0277] To create a matrix display 580, a matrix display module according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure is shown and provided generally at 582 in FIG. The matrix display module 582 is located at least partially on the processor 110 and the light emitting pixel layer 198a and / or 198b of one card 100 and typically emits light of at least two cards 100 A pixel layer and a processor. The matrix display module 582 includes a card detection module 584, a master card selection module 586, a matrix definition module 588, and an image display module 590. The card detection module 584 receives an initial matrix display signal or control input that initializes the matrix display module 582. The initial matrix display signal or control input may be provided by a card user requesting to generate an ad hoc matrix display. However, the card 100 may also continuously receive other RF signals, such as sensor inputs, such as Wi Fi or RFID, and one or more sensor inputs of the card 100 may be analyzed by the processor 110, Accordingly, when identifying the proximity of other cards in a side-by-side relationship, the cards 100 may automatically change to an ad hoc display. Once the presence of the adjacent cards 100 is identified, the list of matrix cards is provided to the master card selection module 586 by the card detection module 584. The master card selection module 586 determines which cards 100 are the master or control card for the matrix display 580. In an exemplary embodiment, a user or users of the card 100 may specifically identify a particular card 100 as a master or control card, and such data or information may be provided to the card detection module 584, . In another embodiment, the processors 110 of the cards 100 may negotiate with each other to determine which card 100 is best positioned to be the master or control card. In another embodiment, the card 100 with a time priority in the matrix 580, i.e., the first card of the matrix 580, is accepted as a master or control card by all the other cards 100 .

[0278] Control is passed to the matrix defining module 588 where the processor 110 of the master card 100 receives an array of cards 100 in the ad hoc matrix display 580 . The processor 110 of the master card 100 also determines the approximate size of the ad hoc matrix display 580 to determine the optimal display configuration for the image, Or any other item that can be displayed. When the processor 110 of the master card 100 determines the number of the cards 100 and the distribution of the cards 100, the processor 110 of the master card 100 displays certain portions of the displayed image on a matrix display To the processor 110 of each individual card 100 of the card 580. The processor 110 of the master card 100 determines the optimal configuration of all available cards of the matrix display 580 and transmits such information along with the synchronization information to the processors 100 of the other cards 100 of the matrix display 580 Control passes from the matrix defining module 588 to the image display module 590 where the image is displayed on each card 100 of the matrix display 580, including the master card 100, , As indicated by the processor 110 of the master card 100, or emitted from the light-emitting layer 198a and / or 198b.

[0279] Referring to FIG. 44, a matrix of modules 100 according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, which may be in one or more of the modules 582 and which may be at least partially included in the processor of the card 100, The display process is shown and indicated as 600 as a whole. It should be noted that the matrix display process 600 may be a subroutine of a larger process, which may also be true for other processes described in this disclosure. Thus, the matrix display process 600 may be periodically "polled" checked to see if the process 600 needs to be performed. Once the matrix display process 600 is complete or terminated, control may then be returned to the original process or a handed call to the matrix display process 600. Although a reference is made to the card 100 throughout the description of FIGS. 42-44, this description is also applicable to the mat 500 and to any of the card 100 and the mat 500, It should be noted that it is applicable to other devices.

[0280] The matrix display process 600 begins with a start process 602. [ In the start-up process 602, aspects of the functionality of the card 100 and any systems associated with the matrix display process 600 may be used for operations such as pruning registers, establishing predetermined values, Can be prepared. When the start process 602 is complete, control proceeds from the start process 602 to the first card presence signal process 604.

[0281] In the first card presence signal process 604, all cards 100 in close proximity to one another transmit and receive signals to each other to establish a proximity appropriate to the setting of the ad hoc display. For example, nine cards may be positioned as shown in Fig. 42, and Fig. 42 is a view showing a state in which a plurality of cards 100 (100p -100x) are shown in a side-by-side relationship. Each card 100 may periodically transmit a near field communication signal to find other cards 100, which may occur once every few seconds to minimize power usage, The user of the wireless communication device can activate the local wireless communication search function as a deliberate or intentional preparation for generating the ad hoc matrix display. If all the cards 100 in close proximity to each other set and communicate their presence, then control transfers from the card presence signal process 602 to the master card selection process 606.

[0282] The master card selection process 606, performed at least partially in the master card selection module 586, uses one or more techniques to determine the control of the matrix display 580 or the master card 100. In the exemplary embodiment, the user (s) of the cards 100 may pre-select a particular card 100 to be a master, in which case all the cards 100 may be a particular card, 100t) as a master or a control card. In another embodiment, the processors 110 of the cards 100 may determine that the particular card 100 is in the optimal position for communicating with all other cards 100 of the matrix display 580. [ In another embodiment, to recognize the presence of other cards 100 in the matrix display 580, the first processor 110 of the particular card 100, i.e., the matrix display from the time perspective, The first card 100 of the card 580 may be selected by the processors 110 of all the cards 100 as a master or control card. If the master card 100 is selected or determined, control proceeds from the master card selection process 606 to the matrix identification process 608. [

 [0283] In the matrix identification process 608, the processor 110 of the master card 100, which will be referred to as master card 100t for clarification of the remaining description of the matrix display process 600, 100 as part of the matrix defining module 588. [ A large number of people can exist in a stadium, arena, or other large area holding its own card 100, so that the cards 100 can be made much more distant and still be part of the Adhook matrix display Cards 100 that are close to, close to, close to, close to, or side by side, for example, by cards that are at least 4 to 6 inches away from some Adhook matrix displays, This process or step is important because it is assumed by the master card 100t to be part of the display 580. [ Once all the cards 100 sufficiently close to each other and to the master card 100t are identified by the processor 110 of the master card 100t, control is transferred from the matrix identification process 608 to the image adaptation process 610 Move.

[0284] The image to be displayed on the matrix display 580 needs to be adapted to the number of available cards 100 and the size of the matrix display depending on the arrangement or configuration of the cards 100, There are gaps or irregularities in the display that are necessary. In the image adaptation process 610, the processor 110 of the master card 100t evaluates the availability of the image and display space to be displayed and provides the best pit for the image. As previously described herein, the term image may describe a document, a photograph, a video, or any other item that can be presented visually. Once the cards 100 or mats 500 are analyzed and defined by the processor 110 as a matrix display 580 and the best pit of image for the matrix display 580 is determined by the processor 110 , Each card 100 in the matrix display 580 is assigned a portion of the image. Control is then passed from the image adaptation process 610 to the data transfer process 612.

[0285] In the data transfer process 612, the processor 110 of the master card 100t sends data to each card 100 in the matrix display 580 via an edge or side 105 via an RF output or an optical output . The data received by each card 100 is prepared by the processor 110 for display of a particular non-overlapping portion of the image. The master card 100t may also transmit synchronization information to each card 100 in the matrix display 580 to maintain time continuity for the images displayed on the matrix display 580, The timing of the display of images on each card 100 in the display 580 is synchronized to ensure that each card 100 is simultaneously displaying portions of the same image. It will be clear from the above description that all communications between the cards 100 in the matrix display 580 are typically wireless, but wired connections are also possible and may be desirable in some situations. Once the assignment and synchronization data is sent to all the cards 100 in the matrix display 580, control is transferred from the data transfer process 612 to the image display process 614.

[0286] In the image display process 614, each card 100 in the matrix display 580 includes a first light-emitting unit 122 and / or a second light-emitting unit 124 that allow the light-emitting pixel elements to operate To display a part of the image. Control is then passed to the image determination process 616 where the processor 110 of the card 100t determines whether the current image being displayed needs to be maintained or a new image is desired. If the current image needs to be displayed or a new image needs to be displayed, control is passed to the second card presence signal process 618. [ When the display of the images on the matrix display 580 or the matrix display 580 is decomposed, control is passed to a termination process 620 where all the cards 100 are disconnected from each other and the matrix display process 600 And is terminated.

[0287] Returning to the second card presence signal process 618 may be desirable to maintain the static configuration of the matrix display 580 in a dynamic environment as may occur in the collection of personal card 100 holders, 580 may increase or decrease over time. Thus, in the second card presence signal process 618, the processor 110 determines that the cards 100 forming part of the matrix display 580 remain constant after the previous determination. The information provided by all the cards 100 to the card 100t in the second card presence signal process 618 may be displayed on the matrix display 580 in the second card presence signal process 618, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > 110 < / RTI > Once the second card presence signal process 618 is complete, control is transferred from the process 618 to the matrix identification process 608, and the matrix display process 600 continues as previously described herein.

[0288] Although the previous exemplary embodiment has described placing a plurality of cards 100 adjacent or next to each other on a relatively flat surface, it is also possible to use a material comprising a material, for example a ferromagnetic material or permanent magnets or electromagnets, Can be used as a mounting surface for a plurality of cards (100). Such a holder allows the creation of vertically extending surfaces that will return a plurality of cards 100 for a temporary or permanent ad hoc display. The ability to arrange a plurality of cards 100 into such a vertical display by including software in each processor 110 of the cards 100 for creation of adhook displays is advantageous in that the ability of adjacent edges ≪ / RTI > and relatively inexpensive surface sacrifices along the length of the display.

[0289] The processor 110 of the card 100 may be configured so that more than one user may access the card 100 because the card 100 includes components and functions that can uniquely identify each user by biometric data. To the processor 110 of the card 100, and each user can access the capabilities and files of the card 100 to the extent allowed by the primary card owner. For example, the owner of the card 100 may allow the second user access to the card 100 of the owner. The owner of the card 100 is uniquely identified by at least one biometric authentication input, e.g., fingerprint, micro-pulse patters, voice identification, etc., and may include one or more other inputs, Or the like. The owner of the card 100 sets approvals in the processor 110 of the card 100 to allow a second user access to the processor 110 of the card 100. If the owner sets approvals at the processor 110 of the card 100, the owner divides the directory at the memory 114 and / or at the processor 110, and stores the information stored in the card 100 for the second user You can restrict access to it. Once the processor 110 of the card 100 recognizes the second user by one or more inputs from the pixel layers described herein, e.g., Figure 7B, Will recognize the user of card 100 through biometric authentications received from one or more pixel layers and each user may be simultaneously logged into processor 110 of card 100. [ In actual use, the owner of the card 100 may be using the card 100 for the first purpose, and the processor 110 of the card 100 recognizes its use. When the owner of the card 100 hands over the card 100 to the second user, the processor 110 of the card 100 acquires one or more biometric authentication inputs from one or more pixel layers The second user grants a second user access to a portion of the card 100, e.g., memory 114 and processor 110, to which the second user is authenticated. The second user can then pass the card 100 back to the owner of the card 100 and the processor 110 of the card 100 restores the session to the owner of the card 100, It is stopped when the owner of the card 100 hands over the card 100 to the second user. When two users are within the range of the card 100 at the same time, the processor 110 of the card 100 inquires the owner of the card 100 about which user should be in control through transmission from the pixel layer . Figures 45 and 46 illustrate modules and processes that may be performed to allow at least two users to log into an exemplary embodiment of the card 100. [ The modules and processes of Figures 45 and 46 can be extended to approve operations by more than two users, and the ability of the processor 110 to handle operations from multiple users, Lt; / RTI >

[0290] Referring to FIG. 45, a user identification and control module is shown and generally indicated at 650. The user identification and control module 650 includes a card activation module 652, a card identification module 654, a card partitioning module 656, and a card operation module 658. The user identification and control module 650 may be at least partially housed in the processor 110 or other portions of the card 100 that are associated with controlling the processes and functions of the card 100. [ The user identification and control module 650 operates when the card owner operates, or "powers up", operates, or performs, the card 100 to make it functional, 652 < / RTI > The card activation module 652 transmits an incident identification signal to a card identification module 654 that receives sensor inputs from at least one of the plurality of sensor pixels, e.g., light detection pixel elements 148, do.

[0291] The card identification module 654 sends authenticated user information to other modules of the user identification and control module 650 when requested by other modules of the user identification and control module 650. The owner of the card 100 is always fully subordinate to the authentication of the owner or primary user of the card 100, although other users are fully authenticated to approve or authenticate to be users of some or all of the characteristics of the card 100. Such authentication is performed in the card identification module 654. Once the identified user is identified from the sensor inputs and other inputs, such as passwords, graphical passwords, voice prints, retina printers, etc., authenticated user information is transmitted to the card partitioning module 656.

[0292] The card partitioning module 656 generally provides partitions only when a large number of users are operating the card 100. [ Thus, if only the owner of the card 100 is operating the card 100, the partitions are unnecessary, and the card 100 efficiently bypasses the card division module 656. [ If a plurality of users are operating the card 100, the card partitioning module 656 may store memory for the secondary or non-owner users of the card 100 to operate without damaging other users' data, E. G., In memory 114). Thus, the processor 110 of the card 100 separates data or information of each user from each other through partitioning, which may be a physical partition or a virtual partition. If multiple users are operating the card 100, partitions are formed and information about the partitions is provided to the card operation module 658. [

[0293] In the card operation module 658, each operation is associated with biometric and possibly other inputs, such as passwords, and the requested operation is delegated to the appropriate partition described by the card partitioning module 656. In order to provide an association with each user, at each time that an action is performed in the card action module 658, the card action module 658 operates as described hereinabove, And transmits the user request verification to the card identification module 654, which in turn provides it to the card operation module 658. While it may be time consuming to verify the identity of each user for each operational phase, multiple processors may be positioned in the card 100 to handle biometric authentication inputs and perform the identification functions described above. Although the card 100 may operate slower for a larger number of users than a single user, the advantage of allowing multiple users to operate the card 100 is significant in some circumstances, e.g., in a business meeting or meeting.

[0294] The user identification & control module 650 may include processes for performing the functions of the module 650, e.g., the user identification process shown in FIG. 46 and generally indicated at 700. The user identification process 700 begins with a start process 702 where the processor 110 of the card 100 senses that the card 100 has been picked up by a person, And may not include any specific operations by the processor 100. [ From start process 702, control moves from start process 702 to card activation process 704.

[0295] In the card activation process 704, the first user switches the card 100 from standby or off to on (at which time processor 110 of card 100 may clear the registers) (110), boot programs, and perform other functions necessary for the initial operation of the card (100). Once the card activation process 704 is complete, control is transferred from the process 704 to the login process 706.

[0296] In the login process 706, the processor 110 of the card 100 accepts login information from a first user by at least one input pixel layer, e.g., the optical detection layer 186a or 186b, In an example, it is assumed that the "owner" is typically the "owner" of the card using the term "owner" in terms of a person who is responsible for the card 100 using the card 100. In an exemplary embodiment, card 100 is owned by an organization and may be loaded with one or more characteristics, such as corporate credit cards, site or room access codes, or other information related to the organization. Thereafter, the card 100 may be assigned to an organizer or employee, and then they become a cardholder or "owner ", but in this example the card 100 belongs to the organization. The card 100 login information may include one or more of a password, a graphical input, a voice print, a retina scan, and other passive or biometric authentication inputs. Once the first user is logged in, control is passed from process 706 to the first user or owner operation process 708.

[0297] Under circumstances where the first user of the card 100 is the only user, the first user action process 708 continues until the first user is ended using the card 100. [ When the first user stops using the card 100 for an extended period of time, the processor 110 of the card 100 determines whether the first user is in the standby mode Or the power-off mode. However, in the context of the user identification process 700, control is passed from the first user action process 78 to the approval process 710 since at least one other person may be using the card 100. [

[0298] In the approval process 710, the first user establishes an authorization for at least one additional user, which in this example is the second user. In another exemplary embodiment of the present invention, the first user may establish authorizations for an unlimited number of additional users in practice. For each user authenticated for simultaneous login and use of the card 100, the first user may set a password to obtain biometric authentication information from the second (and third, fourth, etc.) user, The mode of the card 100 can be set to the processor 110 of the enable card 100. [ Once the processor 110 of the card 100 has biometric authentication information from a second user obtained from at least one input pixel layer of the card 100, The biometric authentication information can be stored in any one of the other positions that are easily accessible to the user. During the approval process, the processor 110 of the card 100 automatically divides a portion of the memory 114 for the second user, and divides a portion of the memory 114 with the information provided by the first user . A first user may access the processor 110 and the memory 114 of the card 100 as well as the full access to the processor 110 and the memory 114 of the card 100, such as photos, videos, To the extent authorized by the first user that may include the cardholder, or by restrictions set by the organizational policy that may limit which cardholder may be set as the approvals. ≪ RTI ID = 0.0 > . Once approvals that may have occurred in a previous session with the card 100 are established for the second user, control is transferred from the approval process 710 to the first handoff process 712.

[0299] In the first handoff process 712, the first user physically provides the card 100 to the second user. The processor 110 of the card 100 periodically queries one or more of the sensor layers described hereinabove and determines that the card 100 is no longer owned by the first user When the processor 110 recognizes, the processor 110 of the card 100 attempts to acquire the identification information from the second user in the second user identification process 714. [ Such identification information may be one or more types of information available to the processor 110 of the card 100, such as visual or optical, micro-pulse information, key reanalysis, If the processor 110 of the card 100 is able to match the biometric authentication information it receives at the various sensors the processor 110 of the card 100 is able to determine whether the second user is an authenticated user, Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > accesses < / RTI > Although not shown in FIG. 46, if the processor 110 of the card 100 can not recognize the second user, the processor 110 of the card 100 may send a message to the legal entity A bank, or other entity, and alerts one or more entities that the processor of the card 100 is not an authorized user of the card 100. [ Once the processor 110 of the card 100 identifies the second user of the card 100, control is transferred from the second user identification process 714 to the second user operation process 716. [

[0300] In a second user action process 716, the second user operates the card 100 to an extent authorized by the partition set by the first user. Control is periodically transferred to a second user action determination process 718 where the processor 110 of the card 100 determines whether the card 100 is still using the card 100. [ Such use may be an active use through gestures using the card 100 as a display or other active uses of the card 100 authorized by the partition of the memory 114 and the processor 110 of the card 100 have. If the second user continues to use the card 100, control is passed to the second user action process 716. If the second user is no longer using the card 100, control is transferred from the second user action determination process 718 to the logout second user determination process 720. [

[0301] In the logout second user decision process 720, the processor 110 determines if the second user needs to be logged out. Such a determination may be based on a lack of input or continued use of the card 100, or it may be as simple as preparing the second user to return the card 100 to the first user. If the second user is not to be logged out, control transfers from the second user determination process 720 to the second handoff process 722, where the user passes the card 100 to the first user. Control is then transferred from the second handoff process 722 to the first user identification process 724. [

 [0302] In a first user identification process 724, the processor 110 of the card 100 uses the various identification processes described herein to determine the identity of the first user. Once the identification of the first user is established, control is passed to the first user action process 726 in which the first user operates the card 100. [ Periodically, control is passed from the first user action process 726 to the first user action determination process 728, and the processor 110 of the card 100 determines whether the first user continues to operate the card 100 Or not. If the first user continues to operate the card 100, control is passed from the first user action determination process 728 to the first user action process 726. [ Control is passed from the first user action determination process 728 to the logout second user determination process 730 if the first user does not appear to be using the card 100. [

[0303] In the logout second user determination process 730, the processor 110 determines whether or not the second user intends to operate the card 100. If the second user attempts to operate the card 100, control moves to the first handoff process 712 and the operation of the user identification process 700 continues as previously described herein. If the second user continues to no longer wish to operate the card 100, control is passed from the logout second user determination process 730 to the second user logout process 732, 0.0 > 110 < / RTI >

[0304] Returning to the logout second user decision process 720, if the second user is about to log out, control passes to the third handoff process 734, where the card 100 returns to the first user Restored. Control is passed from the third handoff process 734 to the first user identification process 736 where the processor 110 of the card 100 uses the various techniques described herein to determine the first And acquires biometric information from the first user to attempt to identify the user as an authorized user. Once the first user is identified, control is passed to the second user logout process 732, described herein above.

[0305] From the second user logout process 732, control passes to the logout first user determination process 738. At process 738, a determination is made as to whether the first user needs to be logged out. This determination may be made by the card 100 on the basis of the interval after the first user has operated the card 100, or such determination may be made by the first user, and the logout may be performed manually . If the first user is not going to log out, control is passed to the first user action process 740, in which the first user continues to operate the card 100. Control then passes from the first user action process 740 to the first user action determination process 742. [

[0306] In the first user action determination process 742, the processor 110 determines whether the first user continues to operate the card 100. [ If the first user continues to operate the card 100, control passes to the logout first user determination process 738 as previously described herein. If the first user is no longer operating the card 100, control is passed to the first user logout process 744. [ Returning to logging out the first user determination process 738 and if the first user attempts to log out of the card 100, control transfers from the first user determination process 738 to the first user logout process 744 It passes. In the first user logout process 744, the first user is logged off from the card 100 by the processor 110. The card 100 may then enter a standby or shutdown mode and the user identification process 700 ends with a termination process 746. [

[00307] The capabilities of the card 100 provide applications for security of the facility. Since the card 100, and in particular the embodiment of the card 100 including the pixel stack 800 of FIG. 9, can collect images and transmit light on multiple wavelengths and with specific coding, the card 100 ) Is adaptable to the environment in which an ad hoc security system is required. 47, a vane 850 is shown. The ventilator 850 may include at least one secure container, such as a secure, locked display case, a locked cabinet, etc. (which may include a first safety container 852, a second safety container 854, (Which may be 856). The venue 850 also includes one or more occurrences 858.

[0308] A plurality of cards 100 including a pixel stack 800 may be positioned at various locations within the vane 850. [ Each card 100 includes the ability to emit highly coherent monochromatic light with specific coding or output pulses. Once the cards 100 are positioned in the vane 850, each card 100 is set to transmit certain coded optical signals, which are monochromatic signals in the exemplary embodiment. All other cards 100 are set to "train" or to recognize the transmission of all other cards 100 in the venue 850, after which the cards 100 may be placed on cards such as auditory and visual information Is set to record the information detected by the sensors of the apparatus 100. [ Each card 100 expects to see a particular coding issued by each card 100 in the veneer 850. [ This coded transmission may be provided by any one card 100 at predetermined intervals or the end of a coded transmission by one card 100 may be provided in a predetermined arrangement or in a random arrangement in another card 0.0 > 100). ≪ / RTI > If any one card 100 fails to receive correct coding from the other card 100 or if the signal received by one card 100 changes from a previously detected level by more than a certain percentage , The receiving card 100 may send a warning that something may be wrong, such as a warning that there is a possibility of "spoofing" or overcoming one card 100. [ This configuration works because of the sensitivity of the sensor layers of the card 100. Although the field of view of card 100 may be insufficient to "see" the entire room, the light from any one card 100 may be viewed as shown by various arrows 860 of FIG. 47 Likewise, it will be reflected and scattered around the vane 850. Moreover, entry of someone to venue 850 or other location in venue 850 via enterance 858 may be used to reduce the intensity of light received by other cards 100 in venue 850 Will affect the intensity of the light emitted by any one of the cards 100 by a sufficient amount because each of the cards 100 affected thereby by changes in intensity of light ) To sound an alarm. As such, as part of a low cost AdHook security network requiring minimal infrastructure and virtually no wires, except for the possibility of providing external power to the card 100 to increase the length of its operation, Can be used.

[0309] The functions of the system described in Figure 47 may be combined according to the presence of cards 100 or other devices of an authorized employee, such as security personnel. Because the cards 100 positioned in the venue 850 detect the presence of these devices, any person entering the venue 850 must provide recognition through their device or the cards 100 may be properly Provides an alert on the presence of motion without an authorized recognition device. As described herein, portions of the recognition may include biometrics authentication of the individual carrying the device.

[0310] Card 100 provides a number of advantages to users in a plurality of capacities and environments. Card 100 provides the ability to create identity and security feedback loops when communicatively coupled to network 210 and one or more remote servers 200. For example, the feedback may include multiple integrations, encryption, security, forensic and fingerprints, or other biometric of the authorized user may be checked against the State and other records for each transaction. The server 200, which may represent a company database or a principal database containing encrypted information about the user, compares the information collected by the card 100 at the time of the transaction. The term "state" may include physical states such as Virginia, but more broadly any government entity that includes such records, such as any state, federal, or international governmental entity. Perhaps a display that looks like today's holographic license (e.g., Virginia uses holographic graphics) may include fingerprints or other identifying images. In general, any portion of the body may be "printed" as biometric and the entire surface of the finger may be included for a higher type of security. The holographic identification image may include objects that the user will have, such as using a scan of their clock as a step of logging to the card 100 or otherwise to the accessing card 100. [ Alternatively or additionally, the holographic identification image may include a user ' s lip print, or ear print. Information stored in the one or more databases may be transmitted to the card 100 from information transmitted by the card 100, such as information stored on the card 100, and information received from the user in the point of sale or transaction, By comparing the information with the information, the server 200 can send the information back to the bay, which allows the banner to determine whether the card 100 is legitimate, not counterfeit, and whether the person presenting the card 100 is the authorized user To determine whether or not As such, the card 100 may include an integrated portion of the feedback loop starting with a user and data obtained from the user by the card 100, data stored in the card 100, such as fingerprints, images, Etc., and information maintained at the off-site processor.

[0311] Additional security can be provided by software methods. For example, each card has at least three different elements on two sides, a total of six total base elements: two displays, two magnetic stripe surfaces, and two CCDs or other imaging surfaces. Each element has a unique identity so that when a user makes a transaction of any type, their unique identities are passed. The counterfeiters will find it difficult to avoid multiple simultaneous layers of data transmission and reception present in the sensors and processor (s) of the card 100. Card 100 may refuse to transmit data identifying pixels that are transmitting valid data versus the pixels being used to transmit the Trojan data. This rejection occurs because forced biometrics or other security information is not known to counterfeiters. The same application of unique identifiers permanently assigned to each element is applied to each side with the piezoelectric elements mounted for the piezoelectric-in and piezoelectric-out functions.

[0312] In a modern adapted POS system, the card 100 has its security capability because the card 100 uses a bidirectional display to interface, and the card 100 has a snap of the user's print You can shoot or acquire a shot. Indeed, the card 100 may require a valid fingerprint or other unique biometric identifier to allow the transaction to proceed, in addition to other authentication, such as voice, password, face recognition, and the like. Thereafter, for auditing or security authentication, the card 100 passes the snapshot to the server, while the POS also has the same snapshot. The server or server operator can check and adjust events, which is an authenticated user and proves that the record has not been tampered with. Store owners and credit card companies may be incapable of contesting when cardholders say their cards have been stolen and a given purchase is not "by them", and card 100 may be used by shop owners and credit cards It improves the opportunity for companies to be protected.

[0313] The display can act as a form of identity. The POS operator can check the ID when the card 100 is scanned. At any time when a transaction is considered, the user can view the electronic ID. As the platform becomes more common due to the increase in users, appropriately encrypted IDs, perhaps the state certificate authority can replace the identity of older forms. The display is designed to emulate the driver's license, along with other forms of identification, since the credit card form factor is the accepted standard. Much more emphasis is placed on the flexibility and desirability of the credit card shape (form factor) in the ability or configuration to emulate the driver's license.

[0314] In today's fast and complex world, it is easy to recognize how blurring can develop between security and commerciality. Thus, although a credit card may be required for a transaction, the driver's license or other document may additionally be required under certain circumstances: age-sensitive purposes, medical transactions, travel, and the like. Moreover, it can be readily seen that the need for security in transactions will increase, in a world where increasing security concerns and also technical capabilities to replace POS individuals with machines increase.

[0315] Previous efforts to convert personal wireless devices, such as cell phones, have created countless interfaces, some are built-in to the cell phone, and some are built-in as dongles or devices attached to the cell. In all cases, the card 100 disclosed herein is immediately backward compatible by its programmable magnetic layer, as further described herein.

[0316] As will be described in greater detail herein, joint transactions involving multiple cards may occur. Moreover, these transactions may involve the passage of optical data (since certain operations, such as those described in the same places, may involve multiple cards 100 in accordance with the present disclosure without a magnetic POS reader) Such as cards with secure optical data encoded in areas corresponding to the location of the magnetic stripe with the other. Adjusting the juggling of the display data between the cards, such as moving the display on one card around the blocking portion of the opaque magnetic stripe on the other card, may involve a number of steps And the latency time. Thus, there is a need for smart cards capable of optical dialogs that are transparent, hidden, and embedded so that the magnetic stripe does not block data. When transactions, such as those described herein, or portions thereof, access the magnetic stripe reader, the smart card may be capable of functioning through the use of handshaking or other variations specific to the magnetic data, modulated, Etc.) can be increased.

[0317] As the Applicant has verified, the thin film display capable of serving the display purposes described herein does not substantially obstruct the magnetic fields. Since the thin film display can operate to generate whatever is directed to produce the display, other generators of the micro-coil or magnetic field can be behind or underneath and, if necessary, Showing through "< / RTI > " and images to avoid confusion. In order to provide a uniform background to the display, the opaque layer may possibly extend over the entire area of the card 100 below the display, e.g., substantially the entire first major surface 101 and / or the entire second major surface 102 ), And can cover a wider range. As such, these same attributes can be applied to both sides of the card 100.

[0318] Moreover, in a preferred embodiment, the display covers the magnetic stripe to combine the mechanical appearance factor with the frontal appearance. As such, the device appears as a pure pixel fabric per corner on both sides. However, magnetic stripes or their positional equivalents are nonetheless present there, and if stripes are present, they are symmetrical in direction.

[0319] Returning to the security features, a recently known or used fingerprint acquired by the card 100 may be selected by a security system that may be included in the server 200 or elsewhere associated with the network 210, Both the system and the card 100 can report to their respective networks. Card 100 may report its dock at the next docking. Two different data events (originating from the perspective of the card 100 and originating from the perspective of security lock) may record all these details for forensic analysis whenever necessary. Security and transaction protection are the hallmarks of card 100 and system 1 and provide proof of identity for every transaction (using recording of all data) to electronic commerce.

[0320] Each transaction between the POS and the card 100 represents two different loops. A completely secure "transaction ", such as in a POS transaction, is an encryption method used to communicate with the card 100 that represents only a second legal" security " , Or any of the images may not be shared. Each loop is a different, logically complete closed loop, with two different loops extending in two directions.

[0321] In an exemplary embodiment, essentially the entire surface of the card 100 or the surfaces of both sides of the card 100, i.e., the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 101, which are associated with the first major surface 101 and / There are a plurality of layers associated with the second major surface 102. The card 100 may have a method for generating handshake routines, etc., in addition to the cell-dock software as shown. Among the plurality of layers, there may be a LED (surface mount) layer, a CCD layer (just below the LED layer or offset from the LED layer), and a MAG OUT / IN layer (again, , And need not be offset from either the CCD or the LED, but can act on the microcrystals by dopants that cause crystals to change opacity in the presence of the magnetic field, e.g., Figure 4d, a more complex array, and Figures 7a- See FIG. 8B).

[0322] In an exemplary embodiment, the light emitting portion of the card 100 has an opportunity by its design. The light emitting portion, e.g., light emitting pixel element 107, may emit colors that are not in the human's visible range. Although the human eye can not detect certain frequencies or modulations, the light reception / detection units 126 and 128 (e.g., CCD) can detect them. Patterns sent from other devices received by light emitting pixel elements 107 or light detecting pixel elements 148 of card 100 or patterns transmitted from one card 100 to second card 100 Patterns allow very complex handshake events, sync up or synchronization events, and encrypted logins. This handshake event, synchronization event, and encrypted login may include, for example, patterns that change as a function of time and colors that are invisible to the human eye.

[0323] The magnetic-output and magnetic-input layers may be formed as two layers in some embodiments. The same piezoelectric or micro-coils that transmit magnetic data can also receive magnetic data, so that the card 100 can be designed and configured to perform or to perform dual functions from each layer of a layer or layer . The density of the magnetic "pixels" does not need that much concentration as for the display technology. It is sufficient that the magnets in a given unit area are important only in terms of density and placement in order to produce a field of intensity X (where X is a value sufficient to write to legacy readers). The density should only be tricked by the stripe reader or the existing magnetic reader to "see" the magnetic data through.

 [0324] Although the foregoing discussion focused on the magnetic-output pixels 109 and the magnetic-input pixels 150 having sufficient energy to emulate the legacy magnetic strip or stripe 104, in other exemplary embodiments, The output pixels 109 can generate sufficient magnetic energy and the magnetic-input pixels 150 are sufficiently sensitive that near field magnetic resonance imaging can be performed. While the power of magnetic resonance imaging in a credit card form factor is relatively low, such imaging can penetrate skin-like surfaces to image shallow defects. Such an ability may be useful for viewing sculptures, dirt, and other shallow defects, which may be advantageous in emergency procedures and to determine whether medical treatment is necessary. In addition, magnetic resonance imaging can help determine whether a finger that is attempting to access a person's identity or card 100 is alive, or is a fingerprint source other than a human finger breathing alive, than a fingerprint copy. Card 100 can capture magnetic resonance imaging video because the speed of scanning by card 100 is high due in part to the shallow depth of scanning and in part due to the capabilities of processor 110, And provides the ability to assist in blood pressure measurements. Thus, magnetic resonance imaging has the ability to be part of the security features of the card 100 as well as to extend the usefulness of the card 100.

[0325] In an exemplary embodiment, some elements of the light emitting units 122 and 124 and / or the light detecting units 126 and 128 may be, for example, in accordance with a voltage or field generated outside or inside the card 100 E.g., using MEMS and NEMS techniques, to move in a predictive or predetermined manner, depending on the magnetic field. As such, the light entering or exiting the card 100 may be slightly changed from the magnetic field generated by the card 100 or from an external source. Thus, the magnetic component can modulate the optical signal. The optical signal can also operate as a carrier in a typical sense and carry data at higher frequencies. It is also contemplated that the array elements of other mixed arrays present on the card 100, such as the elements of the array of magnetic output units 134 and 135, may be configured to move according to voltage, current, . Such modulators may, for example, perform low-frequency modulation of the emitted light, which may allow for a sophisticated manner of performing handshake negotiation. For example, light emitted from the first light emitting unit 122 and the second light emitting unit 124 may provide specific identification information required as part of the handshake negotiation. However, the low frequency light modulation, which may be provided by the initial handshake information, may form the second part of the handshake identification, which may be predetermined and known to either the server 200 or another device, And may determine whether the card 100 is authorized to perform the requested transaction. In an exemplary embodiment, an authorized user can know a distinct PIN or other number of identification characteristics that determine the frequency of low frequency light modulation, and improper modulation identifies the user as unauthorized, potentially additional identification or arrest Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > a < / RTI >

[0326] The card 100 may use a further embedded sound element and allow the POS operator to first scan the user's coupons (or codes that reside on physical or virtual coupons, such as barcodes and Qr) Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > jingle < / RTI > The bar code or Qr code only encrypts all of the coupons applicable to the user's purchase.

[0327] Transactions for goods or services may be based on user consent (e.g., preserving their personal sensed data) to share market data, or may be based on a "groupon" Or by purchasing and presenting any coupon that does not require money from the front when exchanging coupons), or the card 100 may provide a given user with a better deal in X proximity to a particular product or service , Where X is a distance or time element selectable by the user. Interfacing and transmitting this type of information to older legacy POS systems can be accomplished in a number of ways, for example, the card 100 can present bar codes for scanning readable by legacy POS systems have. Additionally, retrofitting legacy POS systems to accommodate the card 100 is illustrated in the figures identified elsewhere herein.

[0328] Alternatively, one can bypass the legacy POS system, create an entry for the vendor (store owner) database, and present an independent receipt to prove that the vendors have paid, And the user can take items from the store premises. In this way, the card 100 can operate as a portable POS system. In addition, the venues can stop investing in their own POS systems and can use the system 1 described herein. The vendor only needs to determine that the person attempting to take the "X" from the store has paid for X by transaction "Y" (proof of purchase). Because the products are placed in physical or virtual carts, In terms of the ability to "pay" for products, the ability to uniquely identify each individual entity improves the POS system and improves inventory management capabilities for the venues and stores for the benefit of each and every party The system 1 and its server 200 can be integrated into Venue's inventory management system for increases in reductions and returns to purchased items. Once uniquely identified through NFC tags, returns to the shelf can be made by the buyer so that the buyer does not open the packaging and all parts of the item It is assumed that the package contains. Of course, the venue is able to limit the types of returns that are performed automatically, for example, food and certain expensive items are checked by Customer Service in order to return something.

[0329] Store security is greatly improved by such a system because the store system can scan the contents of the cart and then match the contents of the cart with the holder of the card 100 when the cart approaches the exit point. When the contents are matched with the list associated with a specific card 100 and paid by the specific card 100, the user of the card 100 and the cart of the user can escape unhindered. If the contents of the cart do not match the list generated by the card 100, or if other issues or malfunctions occur in either the vendor's system or the card 100, the alerts will sound, and before the user leaves the premises Issues can be resolved. Card 100 may also provide alerts at designated intervals if the item is returned or another credit is issued, but the credit is not posted to the appropriate account within a predetermined period of time, e.g., 30 days.

[0330] In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may log a user to a public transportation system. For example, logging may be performed at any time prior to the next stop (e.g., using wireless communication between the card 100 and the transportation system reader). This provides more time for users and provides less grouping of people in transportation system bottlenecks such as readers when entering the train station. Governments, municipalities and businesses may also want to be more secure, and biometric authentication of the card 100 will provide this enhanced level of security. For example, these biometric authentication may be synchronized with and transmitted over the wireless communications described herein.

[0331] In an exemplary embodiment, a door or lock (not shown) may be used to lock the card 100 (e.g., Figures 3-5, Figures 7A-7B, and 7A- (Including a mixed array surface description of the card 100 generally depicted in FIGS. 8A-8B)), or otherwise associated with the display system. In an exemplary embodiment, the user may perform a handshake with the display system of the door or lock along the lines of the previously described handshake, with the card facing the display of the door or lock, The card 100 may be provided in the holder to determine whether it knows the card 100 using an identifier such as XXXYYYZZZ. Next, the holder with the card 100 must pass a second security measure before allowing entry through the door or unlocking the lock. In the second security measure, the card 100 may carry other data including code, fingerprints, or biometric data that the door or lock can recognize.

[0332] For biometric authentication data, the card 100 may take more biometric authentications as described herein, including biometric authentication of two or more from a single target. For example, fingerprints, capillary blood vessel maps of the same finger, and the like. In addition, the biometric authentications may be displayed on or near the surface of the target object (e.g., a finger or thumb finger) at any position on the surface, different target objects (e.g., fingerprint And thumb fingers), and a plurality of biometrics for each subject on each side. In an exemplary embodiment, a first biometric authentication, e.g., a fingerprint, may be obtained from a first target object on one side of the card 100, while a second biometric, e.g., capillary, From the second target object on the second side of the second target. In an exemplary embodiment and to prevent scenarios from being assumed to be fictitious for this type of device, where the eye, finger, or other body part is obtained from the victim as an entry device, the card 100 may be infrared The capability of verifying the temperature through the first and second photodetection units 126 and 128 that can determine the approximate body temperature due to the ability of the photodetection units 126 and 128 to receive the thermal wavelengths Respectively. In another embodiment, the card 100 may also include one or more temperature sensors for determining the temperature of nearby objects. In addition, the card 100 may also function only in the living body by the sensitivity of the sensor layers within the card 100 and may verify different blood flow patterns and other indicators specific to each individual. Multi-part authentication / verification of this type of body part may also be used in any other application of the user card 100 described herein. In addition, the card 100 may be associated with controls for applications such that biometric authentication is associated with its use (at the moment). In this way, the command issued by the user, the identity of the user, or command issue failure can be tracked and the card 100 is locked when the predetermined condition is not met. For example, the card 100 may generate a display "TOUCH HERE WITHIN 5 SECONDS TO CONTINUE ", and if the user does not create or the biometric does not match the one associated with the card 100, The final known biometric authentication is memorized and stored for touching or commanding the card 100. In an exemplary embodiment, card 100 may include a buffer or storage unit for storing biocally authenticated information about each action taken on card 100 or taken over card 100. [ Such information may be compressed or overwritten with newer data to save storage space, or may be downloaded to another location when the card 100 interfaces with a server or network.

[0333] In an embodiment, the door may have the same display technology as the card 100 so that the card 100, which can be inserted into the slot, is placed in the holder and, if it is allowed to stop the movement for 1/10 second, Passes with the encryption. The embodiment may require a plurality of cards 100 to obtain access, so that the cards 100 are presented with a holder (not shown), or presented in a predetermined order. In such an embodiment, card holders in locks, doors or other portals, containers, etc. can hold two or more cards, allowing cards 100 to deliver data most efficiently. For higher security for obtaining access, one user may deliver the card to the second user, the second user may put the transferred card in the holder, pass the personal information to the first user, and vice versa . The transmission of such personal information may be encrypted to the opposite users but may be through channels that can be read in combination by doors, locks, portals, containers, and the like. The holder may be bypassed for smaller transmissions, but larger transmissions that may result in higher speeds (better alignment).

[0334] Governments, organizations, businesses, etc. may want a card 100 for transferring some kind of indication of arbitrary data transfer between the two to a master file that maintains a track of another data exchange, Will track the combinations of individuals with the ability to access specific doors, locks, and the like through national security access. Such indications do not include actual data used to open or access doors, locks, or the like, or data of a type that is conveyed to maintain privacy when not directly involved in opening or accessing doors, locks, However, such data transmission tracking can protect citizens from criminal activities, track bad people (criminals), and so on.

[0335] The card 100 may include alignment features (e.g., < RTI ID = 0.0 > e. G., ≪ / RTI & , Holes, pegs or edge delimiters (not shown), wherein each card 100 is transverse to the pegs (or between the delimeters) being). Such alignment features may allow alignment of the pixels to a tolerance of one-thousandth of an inch or greater tolerance. A complete alignment (i.e., when the maximum amount of transmitted and received pixels is aligned) implies maximum data transfer rates. In an exemplary embodiment, the alignment mechanism may be presented as peripheral grooves (not shown) on the edges 105 of the card 100 that are too small to be important to human observers without interfering with the function of the card 100 , And the alignment required to ensure pixel-to-pixel alignment between the plurality of cards 100 is nearly complete as is necessary to provide a solid connection and handshake, then enable stable and fast data communications do. The magnetic levitation between cards can be utilized to achieve highly sensitive alignment as described herein.

[0336] For less formal data transfer between the two users, the embodiment may include one card 100 on another card 100 placed on the surface or simply holding their cards 100 together by hand, , And then provide a request for a short pass of data (e.g., by navigating the screen displayed on one or both of the facing cards). For example, in the case of small blocks, no specific alignment is required, since a slower mode of communication is acceptable. For example, pixels may be transmitted from one card 100, received by a group of photodetection pixel elements 148 associated with a first major surface 101 or a second major surface 102 of another card 100, May be combined to form a single transmission beam. Although this technique may be slower than a pixel-by-pixel data stream, if single light emitting pixel elements 107 transmit modulated data by frequency (color) modulation, then this can be operated in a faster mode, The detection device (e.g., CCD) can detect the frequency difference sufficiently fast. In this manner, each connection between the light emitting pixel element 107 and the associated light detecting pixel element 148, i.e., the pixel connection across the gap between the two cards 100, is compared to a single data stream. These "connections" can be millions of times faster than the potentially standard fiber connections that this configuration emulates (per pixel). In addition, each card display inherently knows the distance to another by a parallax estimation. Additionally, when facing, the card (s) 100 may transmit data bidirectionally. As can be appreciated from the present disclosure, two bi-directional displays of comparable dimensions, including both light emitting units 122 and 124 and optical receivers or detection units 126 and 128, There are many benefits to the combined output and input pixel design. This configuration is more important when a device such as the card 100 can interface with another device having the same display technology, such as a laptop, a cell phone, a tablet, and the like. The data can now be transmitted and received at high speed, and the combination of techniques enables previously unavailable features, such as high speed communication, in the compact form of the card 100.

[0337] The card-to-card data transfer, card-to-system or network data transfer (and system or network-to-card data transfer) may also be performed by leveraging the biometric aspects of the card 100, And magnetic communication aspects. In a sense, the card 100 acts as a portable memory with biometric verification at each use stage and provides a much safer method of data transfer that is not found on legacy portable memories, e.g., memory sticks.

[0338] In an exemplary embodiment, the light emitting units 122 and 124 and the light detecting units 126 and 128 may use a shared semiconductor circuit for efficiency. For example, light emission and light collection may be performed by a single integrated junction. With this configuration, the card 100 can transmit data in both directions at the same time in a single pixel position. For example, two users may have cards facing each other. The process can be designed and the software can be written such that neither the user nor the card 100 can get a delivery acknowledgment unless the "card-to-card" swap of data successfully ends. Thus, conveying data, such as business information or personal information, is a simple process without the need for network connections to e-mail or text, and in a manner previously described herein to include the emission and collection of data from the same pixel Further enhanced.

[0339] The density of the pixels on the card 100 is high enough to provide a high resolution display and to obtain high resolution images. One advantage to such high densities is the ability to "cut out" or bypass bad pixels with little or no effect on what an operator has seen or detected. Such capability provides a redundancy level that provides a high level of reliability for the card 100. In addition, each pixel can be connected via a redundant bus, control lines, etc., so that the connection issue can also be bypassed or resolved without loss of the card 100. Due to the ability to "print" or form the various pixels relatively cheaply, the various elements of the card 100 can be replicated with minimal additional cost, resulting in nearly 100 Provides% redundancy.

[0340] In an embodiment, bi-directional emission and scanning of OCR, bar code, Qr code or other readable format may enable simultaneous emission and detection between two card (s) 100 or other similarly mounted devices have. The unique structure of the first mixed array 106a and the second mixed array 106b allows simultaneous scanning and light emission of the same area. For reading and writing, for a small amount of data such as items purchased by the user and the credit card used by the user, this information is stored in a coherent May be transmitted through the card 100 of the user emitting the beam and the receiving POS system may pick up the beam on any group of pixels and collect this small amount of data.

[0341] In an exemplary embodiment, the display on card 100 may be made available as a remote display for another device, such as a cell phone (or other device such as an electronic tablet). For example, the display of the other device and the display of the card 100 may be configured to display videos to friends, for example, with easier and better viewing angles, or to display information about the information that the user desires to be able to identify, And can be run in parallel to have a display. The display of one or more cards 100 may be combined to form one larger display. The card 100 can be configured to communicate with all the nearby cards 100 so that the card 100 determines if other nearby cards 100 are adjacent and by the user of the card 100 If granted, the card 100 may share an image across all adjacent cards 100, and the image may be automatically rendered for multiple cards 100 available in the "X" and & . Thus, the plurality of cards 100 can automatically form an adaptive display that enables the formation of ad-hoc displays. Of course, the user (s) of the card 100 may also set the user-defined display configurations using the settings of the card 100 to manually invalidate the automatic functions of the card 100. [ The card 100 may be placed in a slot on the mobile device while the mobile device is lying flat. The card 100 has its own tether or connection or a physical port 103a or 103b on the side of the card 100 so that the card 100 has two Or even three external displays. The ability to drive multiple displays allows, for example, multi-person viewing at a table with guests. In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may have remote control on any host device, for example, to provide convenient operation of the device if the device is an iPhone and the iPhone has caused a corrupted internal display.

[0342] Synthetic crystals used on relatively hard and scratch-resistant watch crystals can be modified for use as the final outer layer of card 100 for durability. As an alternative, the user can also apply simple peel-off covers. The protective coating of the card 100 may be peeled off to apply a new coating that adheres well to either the first major surface 101 or the second major surface 102. The protective coating is thin, optically transmissive, and magnetically transmissive so as not to interfere with the operation of any of the layers hereinbefore described herein. In the core of the card 100, the electronic VVLSI may be similarly deposited or provided on a mylar for durability. Other core components may include carbon fibers, silica and silica compounds, titanium and titanium alloys.

[0343] A card 100 having its own biometric and network juxtaposition (which can be seated between two networks, such as a public and network-based, but private and encrypted store system) Specific data of a user's personal data can be reported to a unique engine. This service, housed in server 200 or otherwise connected to network 210, is based on the results of any transactions that are later captured in database 250 and can be compared to other similar transactions in processor 228 You can tell the best deals to other users. A user may use some network-enabled discounts and coupons to earn personalized best deals as well as other transactions that the user may discover creatively. The data from the user-defined or provisioned transactions can be compared to actual transactions or transactions to form the "best for purchase" method used in the store, and one or more wired or wireless connections 213, 217, 223 and / or 224, stored in the database 250 and only "searchable" via this unique method. The user defines the point of the network or PC to which the user wants to deliver data. Usually, the data may not be transferred from the card 100 to any other device or system. Card 100 docks and creates a bidirectional connection to complete the communication path. The dock for this consists of two displays in parallel, programmed to ignore each other. When the card 100 is inserted, each side of the card 100 negotiates a connection to its corresponding surface, and then if the other conditions are met, such as a user authenticating communication, ) And from the card (100). Card 100 may maintain records of data flow events and actual data allowed to flow, if desired by the user. All events are assigned unique identifiers by card 100 and may also be assigned by network 210 and / or server 200 to unique identifiers. Later, when the card 100 is eventually docked to its home base station, the card 100 can report all of its transactions according to the unique identifiers. Server 200 (and service) monitoring card event reporting performs the inspection. This system is a very strict security card for exchanging cards that turn into social net connections.

[0345] Card 100 may have its own wireless transmitter, receiver, or transceiver, and may use it accordingly as described hereinabove. The card 100 is also a device and is executed independently or subordinately as it is programmed. While the card 100 can be attached to the "cloud ", the card 100 may also emulate the cloud. Card 100 is also a mesh network similar to the application described hereinabove, wherein card 100 may communicate with adjacent cards 100 to form larger ad hoc displays. The dock for the card 100 can evolve into a transceiver and battery so that the card 100 can function as a server to perform mesh networking. Being part of a localized mesh network, card 100 forms an ad hoc network that requires lower power for networking functions due to other similar devices nearby. Thus, each card 100 recycles and boosts the communication of nearby card (s) 100.

[0346] The magnetic stripe may be just light emitting pixel elements 107 that provide an embedded sub display on the inside. The magnetic flux lines passing through the display from the back do not need to interfere with the display at all. Flux lines do not provide any interference to the light emitting pixel elements 107 because the LED and transistor junction techniques are not affected by the magnetic flux. In addition, since the card 100 is able to recognize when it is swiping, the card 100 can conserve power by powering up magnetic strips or stripes only during a swipe. In addition, the magnetic energy can be boosted during swipe because it recognizes that the card 100 is being moved by CCD data, so even in the case of a reader in the case of a weakened magnetic head reader, a single swipe is usually sufficient.

[0347] Card 100 may generate its own power into an embedded coil, such as in an RFID key ring pod (electron). However, the display of the card 100 requires a relatively large amount of power, and a coil approach that relies on receipt of power when the card 100 is close to a flatbed that the user scans to deliver data between the card 100 and the receiver Insufficient power can be transmitted to the card 100. [ A keypob containing enough power batteries can provide enough power for the spinning magnets hidden near the card 100 or the card 100, which allows power transmission in a wireless context. In an exemplary embodiment, power may be coupled to card 100 or provided to card 100 when card 100 is near or near a POS dock. Generally, the card 100 is extremely power conservative except when absolutely required for effective operation of the card 100. [ For example, the card 100 may additionally boost the signal along a magnetic stripe, stripe, or rail that will communicate data when the card 100 is swiped, which may, for example, utilize machine vision-type wide image processing capabilities ≪ / RTI > Card 100 also provides bar-code or biometric scanning, as well as touch screen emulation, which can be used to recognize, measure, and anticipate significant events for efficient power management, depending on image processing capabilities. When the magnetic stripe extends the length of the card 100 in the longitudinal direction to adjust the orientation of the magnetic-output data, the card 100 detects that it enters a stripe reader or ATM (automated teller machine) slot And imaging processing capabilities), and then it is necessary to set the data on the confined magnetic layer and determine its direction. Logically, when swiping the card 100 in one of four possible directions, the direction can be preset and the user need not detect the direction of the swipe. As an additional feature, however, the software detects the swipe movement through the CCD and image processing software and sets the magnetic recording to orient the magnetic-output data of the magnetic-output pixels 109 in the direction of the swipe.

[0348] The individual's genome may become interchangeable when his name, social security number, driver's license, other IDs, fingerprint or retina scan are used. Parallel data transfer capability enables the user's entire genome to be transmitted for identification purposes. The portion of the image that is passed is the user's primary genome; The rest of the image will be part of the genome that makes the user unique in the population base. The basic genomic image (one in a million) and the user's difference (about one billion) will take less than 0.1 second if there are 1 billion related pixels that all work in parallel to transmit serial data.

[0349] Card 100 is programmed in a sleeping but non-temporary memory so as not to interfere with memory storage or other cards 100 near card 100. [ The combination of the CCD and the LCD on the card 100 allows the card 100 to be moved such that the electromagnetic elements or magnetic-output pixels 109 of the magnetic stripe area 104 are synchronously stronger Allows Energizing. The ability to energize the magnetic-output pixels 109 when a swipe occurs will keep the EM noise reduced when the card 100 is not swiped. Other uses of the combination of the light reception / detection (e.g., CCD) and light emission (e.g., LEDs) aspects of the card 100 include human-machine interfaces such as identification of unique objects as well as distance, To allow the touchless touch screen emulation having the capability to be embedded in the card 100. Card 100 will "see " when it is also docked to its own docking station. It may "recognize" the user manipulating or using the card 100 to make a record of the action. The first light detecting unit 126 and the second light detecting unit 128 may be used to scan a bar code or the first light emitting unit 122 and the second light emitting unit 124 may be bar codes Etc.) can be displayed. A number of "apps" can be created because the card 100 will have these receiving and emitting capabilities. For example, one application is the development of a language for sign language that can be a general purpose handheld device that allows the user to communicate with the card 100 silently using hands or fingers. The sign language may also be a combination of appropriate gestures. The simpler and more efficient, the more transaction information (commands, inputs) the user can convey to the card 100.

[0350] Card 100 is configured to store an address book for procurement intended to be delivered to others. The user can reliably deliver address data as to whom he or she wishes to select as the recipient of the item or items, or the user can select multiple addresses of a plurality of items in the all- And each item will go to a different destination. Thus, during the POS, one swipe completes the procurement, the addresses for each item are delivered to the venue, and the venue (e. G. Remote to the Amazon) e-mails them.

[0351] Another exemplary application is an office lunch where people eat together, each having its own credit card arrangements and privileges. At the end of the meal, all of the cards 100 are stacked to evenly divide the meal. Users do not need to carry cash using this method. In order to be used with existing restaurant systems, the card 100 designated as the master as the only card to be used in the transaction, with consent of credit card companies and possibly other financial institutions, It can have the ability to represent itself. After that, it simply runs through the legacy POS, heading into the restaurant wallet. All cards will be charged accordingly by financial entities in a separate session or as agreed in the dock. In the event that such a transaction may require a biometric ID as described herein above for use with a credit card stored on the card 100, the biometric scan may be performed on each card 100 prior to placing it on the stack To charge the credit card. The card 100 designated as the master card 100 will collect data from all other cards 100 in the stacked state and prior to applying the charge the master card 100 can be removed from the stack, The cards in the stack will be listed to enable the user to verify that the cards 100 have been entered. When the list of cards 100 is verified, the master card 100 authorizes all of the charges, and thereafter, all the information delivered to the master card 100 is transferred from the stack to the information provided to the other cards 100 It is deleted or overwritten from the memory to prevent unauthorized access. Also, the information provided by the other cards 100 in the stack is volatile in that the charging operation needs to be performed in a short time, then all the data is deleted from the memory and the stack needs to be re-executed . In the exemplary embodiment, the user of the master card 100 has five minutes to perform the billing, and then all the data provided by the other cards 100 is irrevocably deleted.

[0352] The card 100 is relatively resistant to other effects such as radiation caused by solar flares, electromagnetic pulses, and radiation caused by dirty bombs. Embodiments of the codes (tethers) are typically fibers and are converted into copper in the cord and are therefore resistant to effects such as radiation or EMP. Embodiments of the card 100 are in the substrate so that by appropriately shielding the substrate, the card 100 becomes rigid in radiation, magnetism, and other environments, and unsealed equipment outside the card 100 and legacy There are no vulnerable points other than equipment.

[0353] An embodiment of the card 100 may include all materials that are required to contain net positive buoyancy so that the card 100 will reliably float in water. One way of ensuring positive buoyancy is to apply inert, nonflammable, and / or non-toxic gases, such as nitrogen, carbon dioxide, etc., to the sealed pockets 176a & (Acting as a distributed bore) somewhere else in the design of the card 100. [ In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 has no physical ports anywhere on its surface, thus ensuring waterproof function and operation without allowing any entry into the multiple layers for moisture or contaminants without degradation of the metal connector surfaces . As disclosed herein, embodiments include a first light emitting unit 122, a second light emitting unit 124, a first light detecting unit 126, and a second light detecting unit 28, a first magnetic- Output unit 134, a second magnetic-output unit 135, a first magnetic-input unit 132 and a second magnetic-input unit 133, or ports accessed through magnetometers have. The various magnetic characteristics of the card 100 described in more detail herein above may be utilized or repositioned as an anchor to the magnetic-attaching tether.

[0354] A bi-directional display of the card 100 having an optional invisible magnetic layer that has complete PC functionality and can be immediately programmed to function as stripes in a plurality of orientations can be used to view a watermark or hologram, It offers versatile credit card form factor functionality in legacy magnetic stripe readers or in equally secure optical gold transactions while allowing full resolution display.

[0355] Displays have many uses. Since the display is an output device, it can be used to assemble the magnetic swipe. In addition to ID purposes, the user is alerted to the nearest transaction or other opportunities associated with the transaction the user has indicated that the user is about to undertake and obtain all the details of any transactions for which the user is entitled.

[0356] Like current VVLSI, pixel or CCD related technologies, technology is moving toward increased density or lower power consumption and waste. HDTV is just one example of this trend, but it has merits in density beyond what is useful to the human eye. These very high densities produce communication paths that are intercepted in secret and interfere with or otherwise make it difficult to cause communication difficulties, and card-to-device (equipped with a technique similar to card 100). Higher density combinations such as arbitrary pixel type, sound, light, magnetic, or other, and mixing of these types for handshaking, encryption in each protocol, and then use of paths to send and receive data And the use of multiple paths for outputting the trophy signals not only enhances card-to-card and card-to-device security at a very high level, but also allows the public enemy to have the same technology or more, They need to physically take between two cards or cards and devices, which find out which signals are real and which are transitions, which are then transmitted over multiple protocols, such as light, sound, and / You will need to decrypt the password. In addition, the present disclosure is not limited to two cards or card-to-device communication, but is applicable to any device having this technology fully integrated to communicate with other devices having this technology fully integrated. There is always computation and possibility, with the supercomputer, how long it takes to interpret and decode the signal. But in this case, you can tell what to process by cracking the few billions of possible paths in the public. At this time, the applicant considers that it is practically impossible to crack the communication paths and to access the data indiscriminately.

[0357] In addition, the use of dark processing and dark memory in the card can add another level of protection. In this disclosure, the concepts of dark processing and dark memory refer to the VVLSI circuit in which the query functions are removed. Thus, the circuit can accept data, process data, execute software, and output data, but have its troubleshooting and query functions removed from the factory, and new programs will not be entered into the circuit , I.e. new programs can only be entered through a complete re-cycle, which can be detected. By integrating the dark processing and elements of the dark memory (and all other supporting components or circuits that can be queried in other ways), according to the present disclosure, a criminal can, through careful analysis of a particular part of the card I can not get anything.

[0358] A user interface and apparatus for determining other features of objects for identification of objects may be used in system 1 with image processing to recognize or measure features of objects. The ability to analyze, recognize, and measure features uses virtual machine vision approaches to target virtual touch screens and fingerprints.

[0359] The ability of the entire first major surface 101 and the entire second major surface 102 to be substantially a light receiving / detecting device eliminates the complexity of "scanning fingerprints" New complexity is added to scanning all fingers to 3-D (front side). When an exemplary embodiment of the card of the present disclosure scans a finger (or a thumb finger, which is included in the word "finger" throughout this specification), it requires that a finger be rotated during scanning, All the fingers can be scanned. In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may replace a driver's license of states that may be broadly described as a government, and may adopt the ability to securely transmit driving privileges to private- And save money. The state continues to charge the same price in the DMV or its equivalent and takes a picture of the user, after which the user receives the issued license via electronic communications. The state may take similar skills at POS terminals that require vivid capture of the user's license.

[0360] The present disclosure provides a device that provides a user with an incentive to adopt this particular form factor for maximum two-way display instead of other solutions while maintaining all POS and Internet marketing capabilities. In some embodiments, the card 100 allows for detection of objects through imaging pixels, e.g., light detection pixel elements 148, and uses advanced image processing techniques (e.g., Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Can be used to internally process the received data to emulate the touch screen without an actual touch. Thus, the card user can navigate through the screens and select display icons and files using the positions of the fingers, finger gestures, stylus, etc. as if using a touch screen without actually touching the surface . Some embodiments may provide a lens or micro-lens array along the first major surface 101 or the first major surface 102 or both so as to reduce the amount of light that is being detected (possibly multi- or invisible) The light can be collected in a patch of CCD or CMOS pixels to form a complete image. The card 100 may include a surface area of a size of a credit card capable of detailing close images, such as a retinal skin, a fingerprint, or a plastic credit card press-up against a card. Images captured in this manner can assist in emulating an existing card to obtain a look of an existing card and its magnetic data. Afterwards, the user can keep the existing card in a safe place, and the user will never have to carry the old card again. In addition, the card 100 stores the location of an existing legacy card so that the user can find the legacy card at a later time.

[0361] Moreover, as in the driver's license example, the "credit card" can be virtually downloaded to the card 100 by a security file or computer display transmitted by a wired or wireless connection. To download a "credit card ", in one embodiment, a user may display a" credit card "information, e.g., on a conventional computer display, including an LED or LCD type display, Quot; credit card "is securely transmitted to the card 100 without the possibility of being intercepted by anyone around the computer display.

[0362] Such a smart card, as anticipated by the present disclosure, provides many new applications as a tool for vendors. For example, if a representative of a vendor or vendor may want to display an image of a merchandise that is not easy to view, the corresponding barcode may be provided or displayed on the representative's smart card, so that no additional arrangement or presentation Sales can be made. In this case, both the POS and the buyer cards need to communicate securely using optical media since the availability of the card-swap reader is not guaranteed.

[0363] Card 100 is bi-directional. The card 100 can transmit and receive data at the same time. In face-to-face mode, i. E. When there is almost no air gap, the card has infrared, ultraviolet and visible line outputs and inputs to detect any membrane placed between the card 100 and the adjacent surface It could be used routinely. Thus, the data may for example be transferred from the card to the POS and from the POS to the card. When the card 100 is docked or when the card 100 has a wireless adapter, the card 100 can also transmit and receive data via a docking connection or a wireless connection. By combining handshaking and data delivery through optical, magnetic, and auditory paths, this connection is robust to any third-party interference because two adjacent or parallel screens where data can be within mutual millimeters And the data is moved between the banks of pixels or pixels. The many outputs and inputs emitted by most of the pixels can be Trojans, which are additionally intended to defeat criminals.

[0364] Some embodiments may involve allowing data pass- through and decryption to proceed step by step, so that there is a time for the card 100 to collect the PERCs and apply them.

[0365] Card 100 may have an intended "property" corresponding to a saved card that has been selected as "active ", and card 100 displays an" active "card by the display of card 100. [ The display of the card 100 may also serve as a communication tool. As the specifications of the POS systems become more abundant, the card 100 can deliver facial images and ID information, for example, to the POS operator.

[0366] Thus, rather than requesting an ID, the card 100 is an ID and is also used as a credit card, debit card, or other type of payment card. The pictures may be encrypted in memory and have the main logo and driver's license information indicating that the images of card 100, VISA account (or any other type of account) and user are all the same, i.e., user card 100 ) Is very clearly identifiable and has a primary encryption watermark that minimizes the economic impact of debit card fraud by allowing the identity of the user to pass through during transactions to minimize the likelihood of fraud, 100) can not be stolen. The POS system can expand or enlarge the user's picture at high resolution in an enhanced case so that the idea that the person presenting card 100 needs to be matched with the information of the card 100 can be implemented. In addition, the POS system can incorporate a CCTV camera into itself and compare the person's actual face or his own image with that passed from the card 100. In this regard, automatic alerts can be tripped to protect the actual user and owner of the venue and card 100.

[0367] As a sidebar note, the card 100 to which both sides of the card 100 are given the ability to emit and collect and the possibilities of a plurality of emission and collection techniques are provided, either reaching legacy readers again or communicating with legacy readers It is possible to use at least one of the magnetic and optical technologies for this embodiment to enable more read and write technical functions that can develop up to the future point of sale systems. An example would be to use a magic, light, or optical and audible aspect in a flatbed POS system to handshake, pass data, and emit many Trojan signals so that criminals never get in.

[0368] Businesses such as restaurants, building materials, and courier companies can employ subcontractors to hire mobile workers to interface with their customers. Card 100 may support this in that the card is its own portable POS. For example, a food table-service person, store supervisor, or delivery person may be equipped with wire-free devices to provide hand-over information from a store database, accept payment from customers, or simply communicate temporarily. The restaurant may provide mobile platforms for employers as suggested in this disclosure. In addition, the savings for employers can be incurred when employees use their devices when they are careful to create a barrier, such as a login account between business-related software running on the same platform as an individual. If the employee already has the card 100, the employee's card 100 may be automatically notified to the restaurant network as an authorized employee's card as a function of the card 100 and its support services.

[0369] In addition, the buyer may want to query for related technical services that are not on the display. The seller may, for example, show a slide show of related technology that is maintained in the inventory of items, and the barcodes are explicitly associated with each slide show to ensure the accuracy of the transaction to the buyer. Thus, the present disclosure provides improved distribution of POS in that temporary staff can contribute to the smooth performance of the business without requiring a particularly large investment. Distributing POSs offers at least these advantages. System 1 can distribute and distribute POS stations, and such mobile devices can work with this capability.

[0370] The card 100 can read more bar codes. The card 100 may actually look at the item and scan for any other markings to help identify the item or find nearby matches. This capability uses virtual machine vision approaches to target virtual touch screens and fingerprints. A user interface and apparatus for determining other features (similar colors, textures) of an object for identification of objects may be used with the card 100 and the system 1. This description essentially refers to a two-dimensional or three-dimensional search function, which further means libraries of images that are more pixelated than current data structures. In the situation where more pixels are present, the idea that there may be more uniquely identifiable images is supported by the ever increasing pixel densities, as the software detects more pixels and compares the images at the time of the search. Almost no doubt, two parallel clocks produced by the same manufacturer and scanned in three dimensions are said to be unidentifiable at 1 million × 1 million × 1 million pixels per square inch. However, for 100 billion × 100 billion × 100 billion pixels per square inch, there must be large visible differences between "similar" objects in order to scan the items in question exactly, so that one million of these objects As the magnification levels of the 100 billion pixels appear, manufacturing processes that leave unique markings on each item will make them directly uniquely identifiable.

[0371] As part of POS system improvements, data can be passed in two groups. Group 1 is the item being purchased if it is pre-scanned or the POS operator needs to scan all of them, and card 100 picks up the list upon first reception of data. Thereafter, the card 100 requests support services for any perc and all perc based on the list, and these are applied. Payment is made now. The data bursts required to pass coupons and payment method (s) constitute group 2. These data bursts can only be 0.1 second in duration and 0.1 second later.

[0372] When the items are uniquely coded in the dictionary, nothing needs to be added and only needs to be loaded into the user's cart, and the user can immediately continue shopping or proceeding with the checkout. The user's card 100 POS function may add its own suffix or attachment codes to the packaging or box containing the item if the item codes (e.g., bar, OCR, or Qr code) are not unique Or the device displays one master OCR (bar code) or Qr code, and one code indicates a server file with all items in it. The packaging may have optically sensitive or magnetically sensitive material in proximity to or near the bar, OCR, or Qr code, and the card 100 may contain data, such as date, time, and other information, Includes the ability to activate optically or magnetically sensitive data to indicate that a particular package of product being purchased by the vendee's server, server 200, card 100, or user appears to be important . A portion of the information may be defined in advance or when purchased by the user. The actual surface area encoded with user-provided information is relatively small, so that optically or magnetically sensitive data can record multiple purchases and return events as needed. The card 100 can automatically find available areas of optically or magnetically sensitive material for printing to prevent dust, damage, stains, and any previous markings. These markings by the user are advantageous to the user in that the product is associated with that user, and if someone attempts to transfer the item from the cart, the purchase will no longer be matched and the item will be considered stolen. This intent is to provide all data to Venue's POS system either before the user arrives at the front or nominal checkout location or over the Internet or other network. Thus, it is only necessary for the user's device to associate a single Qr or OCR bar with the POS system, which points to the shop's system for a single record in the store's server, including the user's personal / something to do.

[0373] The card 100 may additionally enter a mode where it may shut down the card 100 in the event of a loss or biometric login failure or may be questioned about how the card 100 only contacts the true owner of the card 100 Or card 100 may provide minimal data such as a low power low resolution display and allow an individual to discover it using a US mail or other carrier to return the data to its legitimate owner. The display may also be operated by a motion-sensing screen-saver or the like to further maximize the length of time the owner information is available. In an exemplary embodiment, the card 100 may have pre-paid postage for this purpose or any agreement with the Postal Service.

[0374] In other exemplary embodiments, a network or website that allows users with surplus items or used for sale may meet with those who need these items. If a convenient match is found due to proximity or due to shared scheduling convenience, a meeting can be established and a secure transaction takes place in a public place. A "selling" user may want to display an item using the display of the card 100, and the cards 100 may transaction secure personal information actively identifying each party to another party. When there is no dock hardware or POS equipment, embodiments of the card 100 may provide the support needed to optically perform such transactions. It may be that the same customer who desires these restaurants and footwear deals desires to sell their goods. A secure exchange of IDs may occur in a similar manner because the same customer may be employed as a night watch guard, a hardware store employee, or a waiter. In such businesses, the employer may consent to employing his or her own smart card (100) for such operational purposes, and the employee is continuously connected to an arrangement that may benefit both of them on duty To the employer.

[0375] Various dynamic problems surround the form factor of the card 100 and the success of the services provided. At the same time, as the ability to increase the pixel density on the support surface is improved, more techniques can be incorporated. The sensitivity of the read function will increase over time to improve the power consumption properties of embodiments of the card 100. [ The wireless mechanism for communicating with and supplying power to the card 100 will also improve over time. This is accomplished using a "card" form factor, minimal hardware features of a card different from the prior art, immediate interoperability with legacy POS systems and devices requiring magnetic swipe or read, , Which makes the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein stand out and preserve their future. Because such cards communicate bidirectionally and have backing services, transaction complexity can change as described herein and adapt to changing circumstances. As described in this disclosure, the integration of similar technologies into all machines and networks, software, and services that will be accessed by a given user is a requirement for users who are required to be known and logged by card 100 themselves Of effort can be repeated with little effort over the course of a given period, such as a day. Systems, software, services, transactions, networks, machines and vehicles, locks, other users, etc. need to know the identity of the user requesting access or use. The card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein can fundamentally change the dynamics involved in ensuring that the user is identified with absolute certainty while providing the user with dynamic benefits, Lt; / RTI >

[0376] This disclosure, in which all such teachings have been taken, provides a further direction to other embodiments not expressly set forth herein. Accordingly, the present disclosure is not intended to be limited in any way or form. 7A-8B, the VVLSI and flexible construction techniques (i.e., the ability to bend the card 100 without damaging any component or element) consider all prior art on this subject. Thus, in the most preferred embodiment, the layouts for the form factor of a credit card size form factor are not apparently limited. It will be appreciated that any of the features and techniques described herein in connection with the card 100 may be moved to other electronic devices to improve the commands and control integrated across such electronic devices. The greater the number of devices utilizing the card 100 and the system 1 disclosed herein, the greater the integration of similar technologies in a given device, thereby improving security and reliability.

[0377] Additionally, given the large scale development of social networks as well as the protection of networks, services, electronic devices, personalization, identity and electronic commerce, the card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure can be used for very short periods of time Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > gain. ≪ / RTI > The use-based diffusion of the card 100 drives the final benefit centered on the developer world, which will capture any and all opportunities to further develop the card 100 and system 1. Support by developers will bring card 100 and system 1 to many places. However, the applicant intuits scope, breadth, and complexity, and the reader can now use any subsequent use of the same technology in card 100 and in different forms (cell phones, PADs, tablets, PCs, laptops, Can be derived. For example, the layers and arrangements of layers and pixels described herein, such as Figs. 7B and 8B, may be included as part of a device such as a cell phone, laptop, TV, tablet, and the like. The keys include certainty as to who is using the card 100, which card stored in the card 100 is being accessed and which elements of the card 100 are involved in the transaction, certainty about the events that occur , The authenticity of transaction processes and payment methods, and above all, the assurance that users are served in the best possible way without sacrificing time, fuel, or harming the environment. The card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein provide a mechanism for accessing solutions to the needs of user needs on a given day in a more efficient and effective manner, if possible, while protecting the environment to the widest possible extent .

[0378] The user device, i.e., the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein, replaces the prior art with a partially new design, because the design is very similar to the evolution of cell phones, the development of seemingly infinite applications . Thus, this new design provides platform development opportunities very much like what people have seen and experienced in personal computing, handheld computing and the cellular telephone arena. The opportunity to develop the development of endless "apps" for card 100 and system 1 becomes available through specific and highly advanced hardware and network connections provided by card 100 and system 1. As will become clear from the present disclosure, the user device 100 and system 1 according to this disclosure are also capable of communicating the concepts with security and certainty, and are capable of exploiting many of the new ways of protecting items from aging And provides different directions.

[0379] The user device 100 and the system 1 disclosed herein allow a user to create a credit card form factor-based available smart system that substantially eliminates the need to constantly own a wide range of hard-copy items and portable devices To use the full range of possibilities available as an advancing technology. Portability of the card 100 allows a user to perform a wide range of activities that are usually limited to non-portable devices in connection with the user's mobile activities. For example, the user can easily carry or secure the card 100 according to the present disclosure while performing any of a number of physical activities (e.g., jogging / running / walking, viking, All of the functions of the card 100 can be made ready without having to have large and fragile devices.

[0380] In addition, the user device 100 and system 1 disclosed herein are capable of receiving their merchandise in real time, while their merchandise is still fresh and acceptable to customers arriving at the user via the card 100 in this case (Or network determination) location for a wide range of retail locations, including grocery stores and restaurants where there is a greater need to distribute, For example, to personalize and automate the purchase process to include up-to-date information that may be available on the Internet or on a cellular network.

[0381] Some examples of real-time retail stores that need to find users who need help within a critical and limited amount of time are grocery stores that carry fresh produce (which can be discarded to show total loss) perishables (which may also be useless if Newe can not book customers according to their capacity and consumption trends, and may be able to show the full hand to the Venetian again). These may be benches, individuals, institutions, governments that are only two petty categories and examples, have significant necessity to eliminate waste, and make their distribution of goods and services very efficient for such users in a reasonable time There will also be countless others that may require reasonable distance / proximity.

[0382] Accordingly, aspects of the present disclosure are applicable to smart cards that reside between business, occupational and security-related activities and computing activities (e.g., secure storage, secure access and remote activities) as well as users and their social and electronic commerce activities. Card 100 and system 1 are not necessarily limited to any use or functionality disclosed herein, since the development of card 100 and system 1 is something new and yet to be developed.

[0383] In addition, because more and more online services are becoming available to sellers as well as buyers, future use or functionality of the card 100 in accordance with this present disclosure and its applications may be used by retail stores, credit card companies, And may involve more thorough negotiation between users or groups of users to allow more free flow of commercial and other activities. Legacy cards and systems primarily focus on the form factor of the standard swipe card and also provide services and support for the card 100 as well as mobile benefits and automation from within the card 100.

[0384] In addition, the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein may be used to automatically access the most likely transaction (s) in point of sale (POS), or to provide better transactions for each item to be purchased via a network- , It is possible to incorporate all of the user's data into a pre-purchase decision to purchase or an actual decision to purchase.

[0385] Basically, the card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein are intended to include and maintain compatibility with legacy e-commerce systems based on bank cards, credit cards, etc., or to advance to POS systems, Or integrate with POS integration and more preferred methods of interfacing.

[0386] Embodiments of the card 100 and the system 1 may be implemented in any combination of the user's available methods, all discounts, coupons and other benefits that the user's support network service may provide, 1), it is possible to combine some or all of the shopping methods accessible from the history of other users using services that support the best available coupons and services, thereby allowing the user to choose the most sophisticated payment methods acceptable to the seller, Discounts (and other benefits such as double coupons, triple coupons, frequent flyer miles, rebates, free extended warranties or low cost extended warranties, free gift cards, gasoline or fuel grills, (E.g., swipe) to perform all aspects of transactions . The user would be able to purchase 20 items with no wasted time in one operation, 20 different ways to use 20 different payment methods and 60 different discounts and privileges. Of course, the methods for these purchases are preset by the user. In fact, the user can preset a plurality of payment strategies before performing any transactions. These strategies include, for example, an even distribution for a plurality of accounts or credit cards, a distribution by category dividing purchases between cards based on the type of card, a percentage strategies for allocating purchases based on certain ratios, Other strategies may be included. Card 100 may establish an infinite number of payment strategies that are limited to the user's imagination, the number of available accounts, and the memory available either directly to card 100 or indirectly from server 200 or anywhere in the cloud. The user is informed of the order in which the items to be purchased are collected, so that the user can benefit by saving the time and by writing the product as efficiently as possible. This not only saves time, but also saves money and leads to a way of providing choices by preference to help other users (potential shoppers) to get the best discounts, and professional shoppers who geographically record their steps It is suggested that there can be. The service supporting user device 100 in accordance with the present disclosure is therefore a service that locally works hard on shopping "primers " and is able to do exactly what to go, what to do, You can think of ways to save the most money by recording all relevant items that you share conditionally or unconditionally with other users, including fine-grained instructions on how to check for a maximum discount. You can automatically compensate for a professional shopper. Time is a very big factor for all shoppers because it can be converted to road miles (waste fuel) that can have a currency or other value to the user, and is currently very expensive and burdensome to the world Because. For example, if shoppers are exactly 20% more efficient, money can be saved, energy saved, pollution reduced, and user time at home or at work increased. Benefits of better shopping and procurement patterns and payment methods become significant when the maximum amount of automation is applied, as provided by card 100 and system 1 in accordance with the present disclosure.

[0387] Professional shoppers can think of all of these elements and can develop and share their methods and primers, and can automate their leadership through their support services and networks that access and tag systems (1) and even more subscriber bases. . In order to further leverage the disclosed card 100 and the system 1, communications between all users and professionals can be funneled through a social network so that successful stories can be further word- It makes me profit.

[0388] In an embodiment, application developers may authorize access to the user's data to a depth that allows the user to more easily use the solution to the user's requirements with a greater discount, return on better overall transactions Unlike any other user device and system known to the applicant, the system 1 disclosed herein allows a user's will to communicate their demographic data to a service provider operating through the services supporting the card 100 The user can finally pay the price. It will be appreciated, however, that nothing herein is intended to limit the services to exclusively supporting the user through the card 100.

[0389] Increasingly, readers have a clear need for a compact form-factor, a reliable and secure customer device with improved versatility, and extended functionality for hosting in these applications. Card 100 may be considered as a "versatile card ". However, the functional scope of the card 100 may correspond to services that may be delivered to the service side of the situation, i. E., The card 100, over a network connection.

[0390] The present disclosure provides a user device 100 with card form factor and surface hardware features having the advantages of magnetic, optical and auditory energy output and input, and thus the user device 100 can be used in a wide variety of real- Interact with the information found for the object, or interact with information that is intentionally placed on the real-world items. The disclosed processes are safe and complete to highly specify when the software is identified and operated upon user interaction and the use of card 100 to perform legacy type transactions (inspection, purchase, return, share, post, Which is becoming less and less complicated. The extension of these methodologies allows each and every respective item to interact so that the user is uniquely identified. Such unique identification may come through markings indicating the same or transactional "history" recorded during a live transaction event.

[0391] Embodiments of the card 100 represent the main components found on each side of the card 100 and the card 100 itself and may include any unique identifier that may be associated with a subject or line item in a transaction, Allowing the development of tracking methodologies using unique identifiers embedded in the card 100 to be combined with any unique identifiers that may be associated with any other type or intangible item, including, but not limited to, Thus, the use of the object, type item or intangible item is related to a particular transaction or action of the user that is tracked and thus first identified the unique identifier. For example, a transaction involving a virtual currency of any form may be a currency unit or a grouping unit (one unit, two units, five units, or twenty unit transactions are basically us $ 1, $ 2, $ 5, or $ 20 bills) , Where the law enforcement agency can track the use of such units for each transaction with complete credibility. Another use is to track unique instances of objects by their unique identifiers for assurance purposes and for fraud avoidance. In this disclosure, a term unique identifier is an identification method, such as being unique, associated with an object, such as may appear on a subject, may be exclusively related to the subject, allow a processing system, Text, or even a unique image or sound, or a combination thereof, that appears in the database as a unique entry that can identify the object. Any of these identifiers may be combined with the ability of the system to track the history of an object, tangible product, intangible product, monetary unit, or any other type or intangible object that can be assigned such that a unique identifier is formed in the reliability of the system . The source of the item is set through history expansion and unique identifiers, which allows forensic testing of the true history of the subject and provides trust and certainty to any user that will be associated with the subject in any way. The ability to better track the history of items also establishes a more universal trust for many users. One way to build trust in a system, such as a currency system, is that there is no corruption and that there is no forgery without proper means to inspect and control such public enemy actions, such as forgery. The same can be said for any item that will require proof of ownership for any purpose with any system, such as equity transactions, purchase of something worthy of a small ticket from a small ticket, and great reliability. Clearly, barcodes or Qr codes whose capabilities are limited can derive correlated entries in the database and provide more information than initially provided to users and tracking systems.

[0392] Exemplary embodiments provide for data synchronization of all devices owned and operated by a user through a service that supports card 100 or card 100. In this manner, data synchronization, resynchronization, recovery, and data conversion for all the devices that the user operates may be facilitated by services (or fully integrated initiated card 100 and system 100) that support card 100 and card 100 (1)), such as PC screens, cell phone screens, POS screens, and other repetitions of other devices with the same technology. By virtue of the card 100 being a lightweight and inexpensive remote display that communicates with heavier cell phones but with enhanced features locating in handbags, pouches, etc., the cell phone can assume a reduced role, allowing the cell phone to be reduced in size and complexity While the reduced quality of the cell phone and the streamlined design can improve the quality of the sound from the cell phone.

[0393] Embodiments of the card 100 in accordance with the present disclosure include new techniques for radiation, detection, recording, and external media writing. These technologies may enhance the developmental aspects of the system and may include networking, tactile or haptic applications including wireless automatic display adjustment including orientation based on any type of positioning systems (such as GPS), user preferences and orientation detection components A rumble generator that does not derive as much power as the current generating devices needed to provide feedback, a local rumble generation on the surface where users can better detect themselves at their finger tips (e.g., blind users) (E. G., Speech parts and braille systems that provide a complete language interface based on the synchronized voice actuation information) can be easily applied to the card 100, assuming that the individual has undergone braille training. ≪ RTI ID = To provide tactile characters that can be read by touching) It can hamhal. The tether attached to the card 100 may include a headset interface that can automatically detect and drive the card 100, for example, for individuals who are blind, or for any person who desires to have voice drive feedback from the card 100 You can convert the data to sound just like the card interface you create. Similarly, the card 100 provides a two-way audio drive path, where the microphone can be associated with a headset and two-way audio, where the card 100 converts the voice to text.

[0394] In an exemplary embodiment, the system 1 and the card 100 may store and use information about the card owner, the immediate family member of the owner, and / or others who may be next to the card owner on a given outing Local facilities and available goods. In one example, the medical condition and illnesses, allergies, etc., for the card's user are known to the card 100 and the system provides mapping and information to the closest resources about medical condition, illness or allergy, either continuously or intermittently You can trace. Likewise, the card 100 can access this information to speed up the diagnosis of a given individual who has law enforcement, emergency medical services and other professionals simply having his / her card for the person. This aspect of the present disclosure will seek lifetimes without any doubt.

[0395] Embodiments of the card 100 and the system 1 allow geographically and transactionally, in order for professional shoppers to save the greatest amount of time and money while other users "follow their footprints" and gain the same benefits and rewards Both make it possible to go faster than users and record their shopping steps. In doing so, the professional shopper can be compensated for their participation through the payment conditions and direct payment associated with the services of the card 100 and network support.

[0396] Embodiments of the card 100 and system 1 may be implemented in the form of a computer program that can be used to provide information such as raunchy tickets, items found, discounts, coupons or rebates with time limits, The gift cards associated with the discounts or the gift cards associated with the discounts. When a calendar is needed, this same system can continue to track reservations and cancellations of reservations for the user. The user may be entered into the waiting queue for restaurant reservations and the card 100 as well as his support network and services may alert the user if the reservation is confirmed. The waiting times for the vans may also be displayed, which may take the form of a waiting time to reach the confirmed reservation or a waiting time before the reservation can be confirmed or rejected by the user to the goods or service provider.

[0397] Embodiments of card 100 and system 1 may allow a card user to associate his / her card with one or more of the other card users, such as group membership relationships. For example, the card 100 may be part of a social net, but allow it to present data that is not visible to any participants in the socialnet, such as during a one-on-one discussion, only in the presence of the user and on their card. The notion of "I will show you my things if you show your things" is a concept that allows users to share using any suitable software function that is not held on any receiving environment, To access data that does not exist. Data related proximity and condition displays are implied by these design features.

[0398] Embodiments of the card 100 and the system 1 may include artificial intelligence (AI) and / or fuzzy logic software to program and / or operate the hardware of the card 100 as needed. The user of card 100 may switch AI and / or fuzzy logic functions on and off, and may also set the "level" of AI and / or fuzzy logic functions. For example, the AI and / or fuzzy logic functions may be relatively simple and may permit limited operation, e.g., automatic on-off functions, or automatic communication with the Benneto network. AI and / or fuzzy logic functions may also be further developed, such as automatically permitting automatic identification of nearby smart devices and setting up an ad hoc network if card 100 considers this network to be advantageous to the user at that moment . In an exemplary embodiment, the magnetic layer of the card 100 may be programmed to function as a magnetic stripe output in synchronism with the motion and will of the user. In this way, the card 100 can be swiped in the slotted reader at any logical position, even when the card 100 is skewed or the corners of the card 100 are used. "AI" or "fuzzy logic" means that the card 100 is essentially a digital signal processing (DSP) that can be processed from and transmitted over the entire surface to a light receiving / detecting device, inbound light analysis, The software provides an object identification and tracking, and the software processes the imaging and, in an environment that directly surrounds the given motion and card 100, programs the elements necessary for "timely " User intention can participate.

[0399] The embodiments of card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure may further leverage the presence of AI and / or fuzzy logic to shut down card 100 upon loss of card 100 or biometric authentication login failure The card 100 may only be asked about how to contact the true owner of the card 100 or the person who finds the card using the US mail or other carrier may ask the legitimate owner And enters a mode capable of providing minimum data to be returned. The card 100 may retain prepaid postage for this purpose. In an embodiment, a new discoverer of the card 100 may also be able to hold the card 100 itself, while the card 100 is shut down in the safe mode, or to place it in the mounted display when the card 100 is mounted , Which will be in contact with the true owner of the card 100 using such communication methods as text or tweets, e-mail or other text type associations, which will allow the new agents of the card 100 to provide their respective identity information if they like (The identities are initially protected since the card 100 can be dropped in the mail and can reach the true owner again), or the true owner and / or user providing the proximity and timing data manually or automatically By letting them meet, two different users can be locating each other. The card 100 and the system 1 are connected to the detector of the lost card 100 imposed on the user to protect all of their cards from accidental loss and to encourage the user to increase the chance of recovery if the card 100 is lost And may include provision of automatic rewards for. In an exemplary embodiment, a barcode or Qr code that provides information associated with the original card owner, such as a telephone number, is displayed on the card 100 for assistance with the detector of the lost card 100. [ In a further exemplary embodiment, the bar or Qr code may be linked to a data entry in the server 200 to allow the legacy devices to scan the code (bar or Qr) and identify the identity of the user / The ability to contact the owner of the card 100 without being informed can be provided.

[0400] Exemplary embodiments of the card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure may be applied to the magnetic-emitting pixels 109 of the magnetic-emitting layers 190a and 190b of the card 100 and / Sensitive sensitive or optically sensitive material outside the card 100, including recording functions for the emission pixel elements 107, e.g., the first light emitting unit 122 and the second light emitting unit 124, Can be changed. Thereafter, the card 100 can reliably magnetically and optically read the altered surface. An example would be to magnetically print a magnetic OCR or Qr code, or proprietary code, on a programmable surface. Another example would be to print the photo-sensing material using the light-emitting portion of the card 100. [ The light emitting portion of the card 100 is intended to use light above and below the visible spectrum, such that the light receiving / detecting (e.g., CCD) portion detects light above and below the visible spectrum. When two recording techniques are combined, the object may be permanently or permanently attached to both the optical image and the magnetic image, for recording on a different card, or on a machine with the same technology integrated and mounted on the machine, Can be temporarily marked, where the image is actually a set of recoverable (readable) data. The encryption level may be left to the amount of "pixels" that can be printed and then magnetically or optically recovered. The erase function can return the recorded data to its original state, or if the target can not return to its original state, the target can be rewritten and changed to a sufficiently unreadable state. This function has many uses, one of which is to pre-label the items to be purchased, including the unique identifier recorded on the item, where, upon query by any third party, the user enters a purchase order, , Receipts, or any other necessary documents that provide ownership of the goods. The recording function can record without any relation between magnetic printing and optical printing, or can deliberately overlap the elements of the recorded configuration. Both can be invisible to the naked eye. Because all prints contain unique identifiers, the unique identifiers associated with the optical record versus the different unique identifiers assigned to the magnetic record can be maintained in the database or shared with the remote database, and any new < RTI ID = 0.0 > Upon reading, unique identifiers should be matched with previously stored data once they are restored. The ability to perform such marking can serve as a very unique and powerful way to manage items to be purchased or inventoried, with reliability and confidence. For surfaces such as the surfaces of the box housing a new inventory (or used inventory) based on the dynamics of the material, the space may be permanently marked so that the material can not return to a stable state and can no longer be recorded , It can be provided for a plurality of recording and overwriting functions.

[0401] The card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure may be used to provide information to the card 100 hardware to enable information on one side or surface of the card 100 to be immediately displayed or converted and displayed on another side or surface. Development makes the hardware design of the two aspects, namely the first major surface 101 and the second major surface 102, and the card 100 available. As such, a simple enlargement of the target (e.g., an image taken by the CCD on one side of the card 100 is displayed in an enlarged form on the other side), conversion of the bar code into useful information, translation of the language, The conversion of monetary values to other currencies, and the identification of monetary units, such as paper bills or coins, and any value from its value (with conversion or other useful information) are made possible by the double sided hardware of card 100. In such areas, such as stamp collection, coin collection, rare collectibles, jewelery, and other small objects with high values, the card 100 identifies the subject and immediately provides condition and value data, It can serve as a very useful tool for storing scanned objects for evaluation. The items marked with the magnetic ink may also be read, scanned, and authenticated by the card 100 and the connection of the card through the server 200. The data on the magnetic ink may be in the form of text characters, bar codes, images, Card 100 also has the ability to write on magnetic ink and communicates with the server so that such a code having unique identifiers held by the venue owner in server 200 of the venue can be made available to appropriate You can program on a specific item that has been granted permission. Thus, Benyu has the ability to generate its own unique identifiers known only to the Venue's server, and by adding unique non-magnetic identifiers such as invisible optical images, e.g., specific wavelengths to be reflected, The ability to falsify such codes becomes extremely difficult because counterfeiting does not recognize layered coding.

[0402] The card 100 and the system 1 of the present disclosure may be used for each service aspect (TOS) between a user and a main service provider and for each TOS of any consultation between a user and an application developer approved by the main service provider , Allowing different application developers to have different accesses to the user's data or to set them based on the TOS based on filters and constraints for the user sets. Additionally, application developers may be given controlled access to the display of card 100 and other elements of card 100 and data stored on servers of the main service provider. The main service that supports the card 100 typically has at least limited or unrestricted access to the user's data. However, sharing any information or data with any entity should follow the law, service aspects with application developers, and TOS negotiations between service providers and users. The user's data is not limited to the card 100 and its internal transactions but is extended to all the services to which the user can access which is accessible by the card 100. [ For example, user data means credit card, airline, bank, insurance, brokerage and other accounts, with minimum and no restrictions, and is set by the user again with limitations. As can be seen, application developers can otherwise gain increased access to private user data because users can share private data of users if users can know what they are receiving on the shared level This is because we will negotiate more happily.

[0403] The user device 100 and the system 1 according to the present disclosure may be adapted to operate in a transaction in which transactions may exist such as the opening of an electronic lock, locking of an electronic lock, machining of a piece of a piece, machining shutdown of a piece, Accessing video or snapshot information about a subject, exchanging identity data for a meeting and for later viewing of a person, updating a social network for a user's activities, and editing and deleting a user's social network activities Lt; / RTI >

[0404] The present disclosure is directed to localized, regional and / or local transactions of transactions that develop applications leveraging the new technology and the industry in which it is desired to apply the new technology and the new technology, Recognize the need to focus on national (and international) aspects. For the purposes of this disclosure, although not limited to small ticket purchases, most social activities within a given length or time interval, such as a day, involve many procurement of small ticket items such as food, energy, fuel, transportation and groceries do. Having users gain access to better methods for accessing frequently needed types and intangible goods and services helps users save money and is more effective at their times and more "green" to their consumption habits It will help things.

[0405] The card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein can develop the creation and expansion of an e-commerce sharing experience of a social network, where the patterns that appear to be of interest to users present in the social net are revealed, Are shared according to algorithms developed by developers with positive feedback from users who lead development.

[0406] Embodiments of the car 100 and system 1 allow for inhibition of all of the user's queries by preference at the moment of the final check-out in order to protect the rights of the user and preserve the user's time. Examples include no cashback, no donation, and no help needed, cash back, donations, and help (or other help) needed to load the user's items into their vehicles. In all these cases, the provision of preferences is used to pre-process these requests so that the Benyet can provide better service to the user before and after they reach the final checkout station. Even with such a cache for the user, such mirror elements may be covered by preprocessing and passing data indicating that the user is now accessing the checkout or being the next sponsor to be serviced. In this way, a teller can create a cache, forms, rebates, offers, someone to help the user, and any equipment needed to help the user, for example, All the services for, and the efficiency of, the services of Benyu and Benyu more pleasantly for the employer of the user. Additional automation can be used to redeem automated coupons, or automatically purchase and timely transactions of applicable (purchasable) coupons with automatic applications, to automate processing of rebates, to capture maximum discounts, frequent flyer miles or any other benefit , Pre-processing at POS, or quick automation real-time processing to include automated selection of payment for items, requests for raffle tickets, extended quality assurances, and so on. The timely preparation and presentation of these various features at the arrival of their check-out location for each user also benefits all other patrons in the venue and reduces costs for the venue by efficiently maintaining the line movement and checkout process. Everyone, all the parties involved in the transaction, and all the parties that need to wait for the transaction to complete before they can arrive at the checkout location benefit.

[0407] The disclosed concepts are not limited to cards and the disclosed design of the surface of the card 100 includes control systems for vehicles, factories, military applications, and other application properties as well as tablet surfaces, laptop and desktop computers It will be appreciated that the invention is capable of movement to any other computer-based systems capable of receiving and / or transmitting data. The novelty of a two-sided display in a credit card form factor that is unique to the design of the card 100 is how a person interacts with the computer and invites interaction from both sides of the display used for the card 100 as both an output and an input device . The design of the card 100 should not be confused with touch screen technology, as it would involve different detection methods for objects approaching the screen, and although the design may emulate touch screens, There is no need to touch the screen to select and use another virtual control.

[0408] An embodiment of the card 100 according to the present disclosure can be made to float pure positive so that the card 100 will float when it falls into liquids, such as water. Providing a waterproof form, the card 100 can reliably handle difficult conditions while still allowing the user to reliably utilize the card without hesitation or risk to their connected device or transaction. For example, users will refrain from taking their computer or cell phone during rainy days, but embodiments of the waterproof card break this practice.

[0409] Card 100 and system 1 may include a plurality of features and a platform that provides demographic data for the owner of a given unique card 100 to enjoy, . Card 100 and its support platform focuses on the hardware capabilities of card 100 to allow application developers to more and more develop applications through network-based functions that are easily and easily accessible to software and card 100 It represents abundant opportunities. While the data from all users can be kept completely secure, patterns represented by users who can be shared without affecting the security or identity of a particular user through automated revision or secure processing can be beneficial to all users, (Methods) provided to the user with a high degree of automation of the user to do so. It should be remembered that a high degree of automation provided through the services, networks and hardware of the card 100 is always considered to be a key set of factors related to the user's consent, frequency of use, and enjoyment of the card 100 do.

[0410] The card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure may be implemented with hardware and software in conjunction with their capabilities and commonality before providing users with platform opportunities for integration and additional functions to the full extent they may be hosted. , Enabling other hardware and software functions to be moved to the convenience form factor provided herein. Exemplary ranges from remote control of PCs and data are based on radio control through home or office mechanisms, emulation of compass for positioning and mapping, proximity-related navigation functions, danger alert capability, and the like.

[0411] The card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure are designed to allow additional changes in such systems, such as POS systems, since the card 100 is made on the way to the market and forces changes in these legacy embedded systems . For example, a POS may track when a user makes a purchase, or leave any object that requires a return. The card 100 then can alert the user when the return is warranted and provides guidance such as when and how to travel to the bay to save most of the time and fuel costs.

[0412] The card 100 and system 1 disclosed herein may be used to miniaturize the components of the card 100 and to provide the same CCD pixel density represented by the light detection pixel element 148 in the exemplary embodiment and / For increasing the density, such as LED pixel density, represented by light emitting pixel elements 107, for example, to increase memory storage capacity or processing power, to reduce power consumption, Allows the integration of emerging technologies used to produce special projections. In one such important progressive factor, the card 100 can host pixel densities far beyond a reference, which would not allow users to find better pictures, better videos, or high definition media players and devices Service. Rather, not all pixels need to be involved in data transmission, and many, if not all, of them can send more trojan signals to further strengthen security, and such high density pixels are increasingly able to provide better encryption methods and more secure data transmissions . Only one aligned pixel is required to deliver most of the data in a very short time (less than one second). Card-to-device communications, or card-to-device communications with a surface similar to card 100, are used to increase the complexity of handshaking, encryption, and data transfer between these devices. These increasingly dense magnetic pixels 109 , 150, light emitting pixels 107 and light collecting pixels 148, and even auditory pixels 111, 113.

[0413] The exemplary embodiments described herein provide an optical interface, pixels to pixels, e.g., LED-to-CCD, and vice versa, when the cards 100 are very close to each other, And provides other devices equipped with the disclosed features. This interface provides a high degree of security for card-to-card or personal access to cards or POS, or other receptacles, such as ID card readers, or security equipment, for example, restricted control of positions in soccer games.

[0414] Card-to-card data transfer, or card-to-system or network data transfer (and system or network-to-card) may also utilize the optical and magnetic communication aspects of card 100 while leveraging the biometric aspects of card 100 . In some aspects, the card 100 becomes a portable memory stick with biometric verification at each use stage, and a more secure method of data transfer is not found on conventional memory sticks. Since the card 100 can be held between the thumb fingers and fingerprints as well as the thumb finger and since scanning can be performed from any of the major surfaces of the card 100, Biometric authentication data, which may be described as photobiometric, can be imaged from a more opaque view of the fingers, and three fingers, which is a view that is very difficult to fake, in terms of biometric authentication forgery or emulation, for example. Retinal scans can be added, which requires the user to hold the card 100 to their eyes for a short time to obtain a retinal scan, thus integrating the three fingers and eye features, And requires a scan of both the user's eyes indicating the high level biometric login used as needed and as needed. Requiring a plurality of biometric inputs to access the capabilities of the card 100 or requiring more combinations of biometric inputs to access the network 210 in a multi- By suppressing mysterious methods, the user's enforcement can reduce any possible negative attempts. If the use of card 100 is enforced to the user, then the use of a slightly different combination of biometric inputs may cause network access difficulties, system access difficulties, and other problems that are expected to form a delay strategy beyond the control of the card 100 user And an internal algorithm for simulating the distress signal, while an automated distress signal can be sent to the related departments together with location information in a quiet manner.

[0415] If the card 100 can detect that there are its surroundings under the liquid, such as the card 100, such as floating in a lake, the finder signal, which is an electronic and visible light signal, . The emitted optical frequency can be determined by an internal analysis of the light, and optical frequencies that are more visible to humans are selected. The card 100 may also use a light frequency that can stand by at sunset and is best seen by humans in the yellow color spectrum. Due to the proximity beacon and light, the card 100 can be pulled into a search team or a personal search and thus can easily recover the card 100. Although the proximity wireless electronic signal is weak and may be limited in its range, the controlled light emission may be limited to such limited bandwidths where the exploiters can use the tuned device to "view" the card 100, Lt; / RTI >

[0416] Card 100 may also include power distribution, batteries, magnetic components specific to the induction of wireless power, RFID, network adapters, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ™, one or more processors, memories, Pixels, tactile or rumble elements, and other magnets. Card 100 may also provide wireless power output to nearby devices such as another card 100, a tether, and the like. Additional magnets that do not interfere with the function of the card 100 are encrypted at a very high level and are intended for use as securing means for stacking the cards 100 in preparation for hyper-secure data transfer. In the area of electronic surface production, these novelties will be tailored within the form factor and various improvements will be made to the VVLSI production technologies and to the world Lt; RTI ID = 0.0 > and / or < / RTI > manufacturing technologies used throughout. Applicants also anticipate possibilities such as repeaters for devices that house networks, mesh networking and servers, rather than just processors. As a server, the card 100 may host ad hoc local networks. Mesh networking includes card 100 that communicates local groups of user's data from one card 100 to the next card 100, acting as repeaters, to reach a reliable source of network connectivity in a given venue. The possibility of any dock or each card 100 being provided to support the card. In this way, the ability to extend the scope of a wireless network, while allowing all data to remain under encryption for separation and merely allowing the user to view his / her own data, . While this mesh networking requires coordination of most users with the card 100, in the exemplary embodiment, the benefit to the card 100 user is that the participation of the mesh network is an alternative problem, Access; That is, only those who join the mesh network as potential iteration sites are allowed to use the mesh network. Mesh networks have a significant potential to eliminate dead spots that may occur near structures and geographic formations if sufficient users of the card 100 are available to signal a sufficiently strong radio signal to an available location.

[0417] In an exemplary embodiment, card 100, server 200 and value analysis unit 232 work together to enable aspects of social commerce and electronic commerce. Social commerce involves the sharing and use of information among users to make brick and mortar commerce more efficient and less expensive. Social e-commerce is the same as social commerce, and is applicable to transactions that are performed exclusively through the network by synthetic transactions or users. In the example, professional and semi-professional commerce professionals share with the users of the card 100 to develop or find coupons, discounts, groupons, and other types of payoffs or connect with users Although living can be created, these same individuals can further develop ways to obtain items related to coupons, etc., with the most efficient possible action based on the location of a given user. The process of finding opportunities and remuneration and connecting to users may include providing maps to local venues, but may also include maps and locations in the local venue. Thus, the server 200 and the value analysis unit 232 can further develop an intelligent algorithm that allows the user to preferentially scan on all coupons that the user has found interest, etc., so that the server can develop a shopping plan for the user have. The user can also scan the actual items or obtain barcodes to scan from the network, such as from the Internet. Actual items, bar codes, Qr codes, etc. may be scanned from the standard display by the card 100. The user may then be instructed by the card 100 on how to obtain items locally at the lowest possible cost in one trip, or, if some trips cost less, the information may be provided to the user have. Such planning and mapping features may include mapping instructions from one point to another and within the venue itself. When the user scans at a coupon or the like, the scan operation may convey to the server 200 and the value analysis unit 232 that the item (s) covered by the coupon is an item of interest to the user. The system 1 can then find the optimal transaction (s), including all coupons and the like, and the optimal payment method for the transaction (s). Ventures have policies that allow the user to repay coupons, etc., many times after physical or other actual POS. Venues can also have policies that provide price protection after a certain length of time, ie, POS. Venue can also negotiate with the owner of the system 1 and the card 100 to provide these protections to the users of the card 100 for better or longer time periods, Is advantageous not only in terms of productivity but also in terms of security. Thus, for each item that the user scans in the coupon or scanned in the venue and placed in their cards according to the policy aspects described above, the server 200 and the value analysis unit 232 may determine that more coupons, And will continue to seek payment methods until the limit is reached. In this case, if the user forgets to find coupons and the like and the server 200 and the value analysis unit 232 continue to search for these coupons and the like for the time length allowed by the policy and agreement of the Venetian, Etc. are automatically repaid and applied as post-POS credit transactions. When an actual sale occurs, all items are associated with a sales trigger server 200 and a value analysis unit 232 that begin to search coupons and the like, and a payment means that may be a post transaction applied to sales up to the limit of a given Venetian policy and negotiation do. When redeeming a coupon or the like at the POS and at the POS system of the venue accommodates coupons or the like in one data upload, the card 100 presents each coupon or the like by bar or Qr code during scanning by the POS system . Although Veny can not accept coupons and so on at the actual sales moment, if Veny allows coupons and post transaction credit transactions that apply different payment methods in batch processes or one-by-one processes, it is completely automated and requires no human intervention , They can all be done at the post POS. One benefit to the card 100 and system 1 of the present disclosure is that it also streamlines shopping, creating a better shopping experience for other clients of Venue (who are waiting for that user's back row) Maximizing the benefits for users of the system 100 and minimizing effort on the venue. Users of the card 100 and other shoppers who do not have the card 100 and social commerce and ecommerce methods such as those applied to the venue all benefit because they both benefit and do not lose anything in the process, viral support.

[0418] The present disclosure provides only some of the capabilities of the card 100. Since the card 100 includes a plurality of sensors in a compact configuration and the card 100 includes a plurality of outputs that may include light, audible or sound and a plurality of radio frequencies such as Wi Fi and RFID The card 100 becomes a compact interface for a plurality of systems. For example, the smart rooms may be pre-set or predetermined by the user of the card 100, by sensing the presence of the card 100 and "learning" You can intervene in lighting, heating, air conditioning, television, etc. by prompting. Moreover, when the user of the card 100 leaves the room or house, the room or house may respond to the departure by turning off the lights, adjusting the fans and environmental controls, turning on the security system, and the like.

[0419] The card 100 may also provide a connection to larger databases at the option of the card 100 user and may also be used to provide information such as weather forecasts, traffic conditions, and potentially even the crimes given to the plurality of sensors And may provide a network of limited data. The card 100 may be trained to recognize the road functions and the GPS function and the road patterns to the processor 110. When the expected speed is different from the actual speed, the card 100 reports this information, Recognize, and potentially avoid. By analyzing the input from hundreds of cards 100, it may be possible for a government agency to more accurately locate an accident location.

[0420] In the exemplary embodiment, the card 100 also includes the flexibility of including additional sensors or attaching to additional sensors. For example, the card 100 may include or be connected to a carbon monoxide sensor, oxygen sensors, ammonia sensors, chlorine sensors, etc. to determine the safety of the gaseous environment. Some sensors may allow the user to determine whether the blood oxygen level is normal or potentially dangerous and to automatically report this information to emergency services. If multiple users of the card 100 are connected to the network and periodically transmit this information, locations such as pollution, toxic gases, etc. may be more limitedly mapped by the presence of multiple users. In a further exemplary embodiment, card 100 may use its own sensors to measure air pressure and humidity, which may be transmitted to an organization, such as a national meteorological station or a local meteorological agency. In another exemplary embodiment, card 100 may include radiation detectors to allow for the ability to map radiation leakage or contamination. In yet another embodiment, the card 100 may include particle measurement capabilities for measuring contamination, detecting smoke, and the like. In a further embodiment, the card 100 may include a semiconductor neutral particle detector to further enhance its ability to capture such apparently inferior subatomic particles. In each case, the ability of the card 100 to connect to the local network is enormous, which can be used to analyze the location of, for example, contamination, fire, flood, and any other attribute detectable by the sensors of the card 100 And calculates positive data.

[0421] While various embodiments of the present disclosure have been shown and described, it is to be understood that such embodiments are not limited thereto. The embodiments may be modified, modified and further modified by those skilled in the art. Accordingly, these embodiments are not intended to be limited to the details shown and described above, but also to all such variations and modifications.

Claims (1)

A communication device,
A substrate having a first side and a second side; And
A plurality of pixel stacks positioned on the substrate,
Each of the plurality of pixel stacks including a plurality of pixel elements overlapping in a direction perpendicular to the substrate, the plurality of pixel elements having at least one pixel element having an output function and at least one pixel element having an input function, And one pixel element.

Images